+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery...

Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery...

Date post: 02-Oct-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 3 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
142
Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Services API STANDARD 661 FOURTH EDITION, NOVEMBER 1997 COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum Institute Information Handling Services, 2000 COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum Institute Information Handling Services, 2000
Transcript
Page 1: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Services

API STANDARD 661FOURTH EDITION, NOVEMBER 1997

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 2: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 3: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Services

Manufacturing, Distribution and Marketing

API STANDARD 661FOURTH EDITION, NOVEMBER 1997

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 4: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

SPECIAL NOTES

API publications necessarily address problems of a general nature. With respect to partic-ular circumstances, local, state, and federal laws and regulations should be reviewed.

API is not undertaking to meet the duties of employers, manufacturers, or suppliers towarn and properly train and equip their employees, and others exposed, concerning healthand safety risks and precautions, nor undertaking their obligations under local, state, orfederal laws.

Information concerning safety and health risks and proper precautions with respect to par-ticular materials and conditions should be obtained from the employer, the manufacturer orsupplier of that material, or the material safety data sheet.

Nothing contained in any API publication is to be construed as granting any right, byimplication or otherwise, for the manufacture, sale, or use of any method, apparatus, or prod-uct covered by letters patent. Neither should anything contained in the publication be con-strued as insuring anyone against liability for infringement of letters patent.

Generally, API standards are reviewed and revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn at least everyfive years. Sometimes a one-time extension of up to two years will be added to this reviewcycle. This publication will no longer be in effect five years after its publication date as anoperative API standard or, where an extension has been granted, upon republication. Statusof the publication can be ascertained from the API Authoring Department [telephone (202)682-8000]. A catalog of API publications and materials is published annually and updatedquarterly by API, 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.

This document was produced under API standardization procedures that ensure appropri-ate notification and participation in the developmental process and is designated as an APIstandard. Questions concerning the interpretation of the content of this standard or com-ments and questions concerning the procedures under which this standard was developedshould be directed in writing to the director of the Authoring Department (shown on the titlepage of this document), American Petroleum Institute, 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington,D.C. 20005. Requests for permission to reproduce or translate all or any part of the materialpublished herein should also be addressed to the director.

API standards are published to facilitate the broad availability of proven, sound engineer-ing and operating practices. These standards are not intended to obviate the need for apply-ing sound engineering judgment regarding when and where these standards should beutilized. The formulation and publication of API standards is not intended in any way toinhibit anyone from using any other practices.

Any manufacturer marking equipment or materials in conformance with the markingrequirements of an API standard is solely responsible for complying with all the applicablerequirements of that standard. API does not represent, warrant, or guarantee that such prod-ucts do in fact conform to the applicable API standard.

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,

without prior written permission from the publisher. Contact the Publisher, API Publishing Services, 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.

Copyright © 1997 American Petroleum Institute

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 5: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

iii

FOREWORD

This standard is based on the accumulated knowledge and experience of petroleum refin-ers, air-cooled heat exchanger manufacturers, and engineering contractors. The objective ofthis publication is to provide a purchase specification to facilitate the manufacture and pro-curement of air-cooled heat exchangers for use in refinery service.

This standard requires the purchaser to specify certain details and features. Although it isrecognized that the purchaser may desire to modify, delete, or amplify sections of this stan-dard, it is strongly recommended that all modifications, deletions, and amplifications bemade by supplementing this standard, rather than by rewriting or incorporating sectionsthereof into another complete standard.

API publications may be used by anyone desiring to do so. Every effort has been made bythe Institute to assure the accuracy and reliability of the data contained in them; however, theInstitute makes no representation, warranty, or guarantee in connection with this publicationand hereby expressly disclaims any liability or responsibility for loss or damage resultingfrom its use or for the violation of any federal, state, or municipal regulation with which thispublication may conflict.

Suggested revisions are invited and should be submitted to the director of the Manufactur-ing, Distribution and Marketing Department, American Petroleum Institute, 1220 L Street,N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 6: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

iii

IMPORTANT INFORMATION CONCERNING USE OFASBESTOS OR ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS

Asbestos is specified or referenced for certain components of the equipment described insome API standards. It has been of great usefulness in minimizing fire hazards associatedwith petroleum processing. It has also been a universal sealing material, compatible withmost refining fluid services.

Certain serious adverse health effects are associated with asbestos, among them the seri-ous and often fatal diseases of lung cancer, asbestosis, and mesothelioma (a cancer of thechest and abdominal linings). The degree of exposure to asbestos varies with the product andwork practices involved.

Consult the most recent edition of the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety andHealth Administration (OSHA) Health Standard for Asbestos, 29

Code of Federal Regula-tions

Section 1910:1001; the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s National EmissionStandard for Hazardous Air Pollutants concerning Asbestos, 40

Code of Federal Regulations

Sections 61.140 through 61.156; and the proposed rule by the U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency (EPA), proposing labeling requirements and phased banning of asbestos products,published as 51 Federal Register 3738-3759 (January 29, 1986).

There are currently in use and under development a number of substitute materials toreplace asbestos in certain applications. Manufacturers and users are encouraged to developand use effective substitute materials which can meet the specifications for, and operatingrequirements of, the equipment to which they would apply.

Safety and health information with respect to particular products or materials can beobtained from the employer, the manufacturer or supplier of that product or material, or theMaterial Safety Data Sheet.

iv

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 7: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

v

CONTENTS

Page

1 SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 Conflicting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

3 DEFINITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

4 PROPOSALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84.1 Purchaser’s Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84.2 Vendor’s Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

5 DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85.1 Approval Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85.2 Final Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

6 DESIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96.1 Tube Bundle Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96.2 Air Side Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156.3 Structural Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

7 MATERIALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237.1 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237.2 Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247.3 Other Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

8 FABRICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248.1 Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248.2 Postweld Heat Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248.3 Tube-to-Sheet Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258.4 Gasket Contact Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258.5 Thread Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268.6 Alignment and Tolerances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268.7 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

9 INSPECTION, EXAMINATION, AND TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269.2 Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269.3 Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289.4 Shop Run-In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289.5 Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

10 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2910.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2910.2 Surfaces and Finishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2910.3 Identification, Conditioning, and Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

11 SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2911.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 8: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

v

CONTENTS

Page

11.2 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2911.3 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2911.4 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

APPENDIX A NOTES TO PURCHASER AND VENDOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31APPENDIX B AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER CHECKLIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . 33APPENDIX C TYPICAL AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER NOISE

DATA SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35APPENDIX D STANDARDIZED ELECTRONIC DATA EXCHANGE

FILE SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37APPENDIX E ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR HEADER/TUBE

RESTRAINT RELIEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51APPENDIX F MEASUREMENT OF NOISE FROM AIR-COOLED

HEAT EXCHANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53APPENDIX G WINTERIZATION OF AIR-COOLED HEAT

EXCHANGERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Figures1 Typical Components of an Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Typical Bay Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Typical Construction of Tube Bundles with Removable Cover-Plate

and Removable Bonnet-Headers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Typical Confined and Full-Face Gasket Joint Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Typical Construction of a Tube Bundle with Plug Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Typical Plenum Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Typical Drive Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Maximum Allowable Nozzle Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Fan Dispersion Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1610 Standard Tolerances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Tables1 Minimum Flange Bolt Spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Nominal Tube Hole Diameters and Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25D-1 Neutral Data Exchange File Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

vi

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 9: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

1

Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Services

1 Scope

This standard covers the minimum requirements fordesign, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing, and prepa-ration for shipment of refinery process air-cooled heatexchangers.

The air-cooled heat exchanger shall be of the forced- orinduced-draft type and shall include components as describedin Figure 1 and any auxiliaries such as ladders and platforms.

1.1 GENERAL

All pressure components of the exchanger including sup-plemental steam coils shall conform to the requirements ofSection VIII, Division 1 of the American Society of Mechani-cal Engineers (ASME)

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

andthe supplemental requirements herein, regardless of whethercode stamping is required.

When the exchanger is to contain lethal substances asnoted on the specification sheet, construction of pressureparts shall be in accordance with paragraph UW-2 (a), Sec-tion VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code.

The vendor shall comply with local rules and regulationsthat are specified by the purchaser.

Note: A bullet (•) at the beginning of a paragraph indicates where a decisionmay be required of the purchaser which may not be obvious from the specifi-cation sheet (see checklist shown in Appendix B). A dagger (†) at the begin-ning of a paragraph indicates where an item or items are mentioned whichappear on the air-cooled heat exchanger specification sheet (see Appendix D).

1.2 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1

In case of conflict between this standard and theinquiry or order, the inquiry or order shall govern.

1.2.2

Unless an exception is specifically stated as such inthe order, the vendor shall obtain written approval from thepurchaser before proceeding with the work affected by a con-flict between the proposal and the order.

1.3 NOMENCLATURE

Figure 1 shows typical components of an air-cooled heatexchanger. Figure 2 shows typical bay arrangements. Figures3 and 4 show typical construction of tube bundles withremovable-cover-plate and removable-bonnet headers. Figure5 shows typical construction of a tube bundle with plug head-ers. Figure 6 shows typical plenum arrangements. Figure 7shows typical drive arrangements.

2 Referenced Publications

The latest editions or revisions of the following standards,codes, or specifications shall, to the extent specified herein,form a part of this standard:

APISpec 1B

Specification for Oil Field V-Belting

Std 611

General-Purpose Steam Turbines for RefineryServices

AFBMA

1

Std 9

Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

Std 11

Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bear-ings

AGMA

2

6001-C

Design and Selection of Components forEnclosed Gear Drives

420.04

Practice for Enclosed Speed Reducers orIncreasers Using Spur, Helical, Herringbone,and Spiral Bevel Gears

AISC

3

M011

Manual of Steel Construction Specification forthe Design, Fabrication, and Erection ofStructural Steel for Buildings

S302

Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildingsand Bridges

S314

Specification for Structural Joints UsingASTM A325 or A490 Bolts

AISI

4

Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed SteelStructural Members

ANSI

5

A58.1

Buildings Code Requirement for MinimumDesign Loads in Buildings and Other Struc-tures

B1.1

Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNRThread Form)

B1.20.1

Pipe Threads General Purpose

B4.1

Preferred Limits and Fits for Cylindrical Parts

1

Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer’s Association, 1101 Connecticut Ave-nue, N. W., Suite 700, Washington, D. C. 20036.

2

American Gear Manufacturer’s Association, 1500 King Street, Suite 201,Alexandria, Virginia 22314.

3

American Institute of Steel Construction, 400 North Michigan Avenue, Chi-cago, Illinois 60611.

4

American Iron and Steel Institute, 113 15th Street, N. W. Suite 300, Wash-ington, D. C. 20005.

5

American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York,New York 10018.

(text continued on page 7)

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 10: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

2 API S

TANDARD

661

Figure 2—Typical Bay Arrangements

1

2

6

7

98

4

2

5

3

2

3

1 94

3

2

3

5

6

7

Legend

1. Tube bundle2. Header3. Nozzle4. Supporting column5. Plenum

6. Fan7. Fan ring8. Fan deck9. Drive assembly

(A) Forced Draft (B) Induced Draft

Two-BayOne-Bay

Tube bundle

Figure 1—Typical Components of an Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 11: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

A

IR

-C

OOLED

H

EAT

E

XCHANGERS

FOR

G

ENERAL

R

EFINERY

S

ERVICE

3

Figure 3—Typical Construction of Tube Bundles with Removable Cover-Plate and Removable Bonnet-Headers

2

7

4 13 1 5 9 12 10 1 15 8

4

7

6

7

2

15

118

414

Legend

1. Tubesheet2. Removable cover plate3. Removable bonnet4. Top and bottom plates5. Tube6. Pass partition7. Gasket8. Nozzle

9. Side frame10. Tube spacer11. Tube support cross-member12. Tube keeper13. Vent14. Drain15. Instrument connection

(A) Removable—Cover-Plate Header

3

7

413 1 5 9 12 10 1 15 8

4

7

6

7

3

15

11

8414

(B) Removable—Bonnet Header

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 12: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

4 API S

TANDARD

661

Figure 5—Typical Construction of a Tube Bundle with Plug Headers

(A) Stud Construction,Confined Gasket

(B) Flanged Construction,Confined Gasket

(C) Flanged Construction,Full-Face Gasket

Legend

1. Tubesheet2. Plug sheet3. Top and bottom plates4. End plate5. Tube6. Pass partition7. Stiffener8. Plug

9. Nozzle10. Side frame11. Tube spacer12. Tube support cross-member13. Tube keeper14. Vent15. Drain16. Instrument connection

15

74

8

8

2

1

10

3

14 510 13 11 16 9

3

6

8

16

1293

View ‘‘A–A”

‘‘A” ‘‘A”

Figure 4—Typical Confined and Full-Face Gasket Joint Details

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 13: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

A

IR

-C

OOLED

H

EAT

E

XCHANGERS

FOR

G

ENERAL

R

EFINERY

S

ERVICE

5

(A) Forced Draft

(B) Induced Draft

Box-type plenum Transition plenum

Box-type plenum Transition plenum

Figure 6—Typical Plenum Arrangements

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 14: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

6 API S

TANDARD

661

Figure 7—Typical Drive Arrangements

Legend

1. Fan2. Gear3. Coupling4. Bearing5. Sheave

6. Belt Drive7. Motor8. Fan ring9. Base plate10. Fan support

(A) Direct Right-Angle Gear Drive

8132

9

7

(B) Belt Drive

(C) Direct Motor Drive (D) Right-Angle Gear Drive with Fan Support

(E) Suspended Belt Drive, Motor Shaft Down (F) Suspended Belt Drive, Motor Shaft Up

8 1 10 4

5 7

9

56

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 15: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

A

IR

-C

OOLED

H

EAT

E

XCHANGERS

FOR

G

ENERAL

R

EFINERY

S

ERVICE

7

B16.5

Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fitting

B16.11

Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding andThreading

B17.1

Keys and Keyseats

ASME

6

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Section II

Material Specifications

SA-105

Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel forPipe and Components

SA-193

Specifications for Alloy Steel and StainlessSteel Bolting Materials for High-TemperatureService

SA-194

Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nutsfor Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temper-ature Service

SA-388

Specification for Ultrasonic Examination ofSteel Plates

SA-435

Specification for Straight-Beam, UltrasonicExamination of Steel Plates

Section V

Nondestructive Examination

Section VIII

Division 1, Pressure Vessels

Section IX

Welding and Brazing Qualifications

ASTM

7

A123

Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip, Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

A143

Standard Practice for Safeguarding AgainstEmbrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Struc-tural Steel Products and Procedure for Detect-ing Embrittlement

A153

Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) onIron and Steel Hardware

A384

Recommended Practice for SafeguardingAgainst Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies

A385

Standard Practice for Providing High-QualityZinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)

A633

Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron andSteel

AWS

8

D1.1

Structural Welding Code—Steel

ICBO

9

Uniform Building Code

OSHA

10

Occupational Safety and Health Standards of the Fed-eral Register

RMA-MPTA-RAC

11

Technical Bulletin IP-3-2

V-Belt Oil Resistance

Engineering Standard IP-20

Specifications for Driv-ers Using ClassicalMultiple V-Belts

Engineering Standard IP-22

Specifications for Driv-ers Using Narrow Mul-tiple V-Belts

SSPC

12

Systems and Specifications Steel Structures Painting Manual

, Volume 2, “Surface PreparationSpecifications,” Chapter 2

3 Definitions

For the purposes of this standard, the following definitionsapply:

3.1 bank:

One or more bays including one or more itemsarranged in a continuous structure.

3.2 bare tube surface:

Outside surface of tubes, basedon length measured between outside face of headertubesheets, in square feet (square meters).

3.3 bay: One or more tubes bundles serviced by two ormore fans complete with structure, plenum, and other atten-dant equipment.

3.4 effective (Eff.) MTD: Log mean temperature differ-ence weighted for non-linear heat release and corrected forpass arrangement.

3.5 finned tube surface: Total outside surface exposedto air, in square feet (square meters).

3.6 forced-draft type: Exchanger designed with tubebundles located on the discharge side of the fan.

3.7 induced-draft type: Exchanger designed with tubebundles located on the suction side of the fan.

6American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, NewYork, New York 10017.7American Society for Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, WestConshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428.8American Welding Society, Inc., P.O. Box 351040, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road,Miami, Florida 33135.9International Conference of Building Officials, 5360 South Workman MillRoad, Whittier, California 90601.

10Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Technical Data CenterRoom N2439, Francis Perkins Department of Labor Building, 200 Constitu-tion Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210.11The Rubber Manufacturers Association Inc., 1400 K Street, N.W., Wash-ington, D.C. 20005. Mechanical Power Transmission Association, 800 Custer Avenue, Evanston,Illinois 60202. The Rubber Association of Canada, 89 Queens Way West, Mississauga,Ontario, Canada L5B 2V2.12Steel Structure Painting Council, 4400 Fifth Ave., Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania15213.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 16: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

8 API STANDARD 661

3.8 item: One or more tube bundles in one or more baysfor an individual service.

3.9 item number: Purchaser’s identification number foran item.

3.10 tube bundle: Assembly of headers, tubes, andframes.

4 Proposals4.1 PURCHASER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

4.1.1 The Purchaser’s inquiry shall include pertinent datasheets, the specification sheet, and the information outlined inthe checklist (see Appendices A through D). The purchasershall specify if an item is to meet any special requirementssuch as hydrogen service, lethal service, wet hydrogen sulfideservice, low ambient temperature service, location andobstruction to airflow, other heat sources, etc.

4.1.2 The number of copies of drawings, specificationsheets, and data reports, to be supplied by the vendor, asrequired in the following paragraphs, shall be specified in theinquiry.

4.2 VENDOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

4.2.1 The vendor’s proposal shall include a completedspecification sheet for each item (see Appendix D).

4.2.2 A proposal drawing including major dimensions inplan and elevation and nozzle size and orientation shall befurnished.

4.2.3 The proposal shall state whether vertical mountedelectric motors are to be shaft-up or shaft-down.

4.2.4 The fabrication procedure (including welding proce-dure) shall be furnished for welded tube-to-tube-sheet joints.

4.2.5 The proposal shall fully define the extent of shopassembly as well as a general description of the componentsto be assembled in the field.

4.2.6 Proposals for designs which are not fully described inthis standard (see 1.3) shall be accompanied by additionaldrawings sufficient to describe the details of construction.

4.2.7 The proposal shall include a detailed description ofany exceptions to the specified requirements.

4.2.8 The proposal shall include a noise data sheet (seeAppendix C), if specified by the purchaser.

4.2.9 The proposal shall include fan performance curves, ifspecified by the purchaser.

4.2.10 The proposal shall state the number of calendardays the vendor will require to submit outline drawings to thepurchaser for approval.

4.2.11 The proposal shall state the number of calendardays the vendor will require to submit proposed welding pro-cedures to the purchaser for approval.

4.2.12 The shipping date shall be specified as a number ofweeks after receipt of verbal or written notification of theorder. This should include a specified length of time forreview and return of drawings marked “Approved for con-struction” and a specified time after purchase order the ven-dor will submit drawings to purchaser.

5 Documentation5.1 APPROVAL INFORMATION

5.1.1 The vendor shall submit for approval outline draw-ings for each air-cooled heat exchanger item. The drawingsshall include the following information:

a. The service, the purchaser’s item number, the projectname and location, the purchaser’s order number, and thevendor’s shop order number.b. Design pressure, maximum allowable working pressure,test pressure, maximum and minimum design temperatureand corrosion allowance.c. Any applicable codes and customer’s purchase specifica-tions.d. Material specifications, including grades, for all pressureparts.e. Overall dimensions.f. Dimensions and locations of supports, including size ofbolts.g. Nozzle size, rating, facing, location, projection beyondheader surface, allowable loadings (forces and moments), anddirection of flow.h. Drive mount details.i. Weights of the tube bundle, the exchanger empty and fullof water, and the heaviest component or combination of com-ponents intended by the vendor to be handled in a single lift.j. Column reactions for each load type listed in 6.3.3.k. Postweld heat treatment requirements.l. Radiographic and other examination requirements.m. Surface preparation and painting requirements.n. Design exposure temperatures for mechanical and instru-mentation components.

5.1.2 The approval of outline drawings by the purchasershall not relieve the vendor of responsibility to meet therequirements of the purchase order.

5.1.3 Upon receipt of the purchaser’s approval of outlinedrawings, the vendor shall also furnish gasket detail draw-ings, field assembly drawings, and drawings for all auxiliaryequipment and controls furnished. Drawings shall show elec-trical and control connections including motive and signal airfor any pneumatically actuated louvers or fans. The gasketdetails (including type and material) shall be shown on a sep-

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 17: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 9

arate drawing. The gasket drawings shall not be marked withany restrictions for use.

5.1.4 Calculations made in accordance with the ASMECode for the design of pressure components, includingheader boxes, tubes and tube joints, shall be submitted forapproval. Additionally, sufficient detail shall be supplied forany non-standard pressure boundary components, such asswage type transition nozzles.

5.1.5 All proposed welding procedures and qualificationsshall be submitted for approval prior to the start of fabrica-tion, if required by purchaser.

5.1.6 Further engineering information required from thevendor for installation, operation, maintenance, or inspectionpurposes shall be a matter of agreement between the pur-chaser and the vendor.

5.2 FINAL RECORDS

5.2.1 Within 10 days after the exchanger is shipped, thevendor shall furnish the purchaser with the following docu-ments. These shall show any changes made after approval.

a. “As built” specification sheet, including material specifica-tion and grade for all pressure parts. b. Manufacturer’s data report (Form U-1A, Section VIII,Division 1 of the ASME Code.)c. Certified material tests reports for all pressure parts.d. Fan and hub data (including shaft bore and keyway dimen-sions and coupling and sheave data).e. Schematic control diagram for automatically controlledfan pitch or louver blade adjustment shall be provided if thecontroller is furnished by the vendor.f. Installation, operation, and maintenance instructions,including the type of lubrication furnished for gears and bear-ingsg. Certified parts list.h. Certified noise data sheet for the air-cooled heat exchangerwith fans operating at rated speed and design conditions, ifspecified by purchaser. i. Fan characteristic performance curve showing the operat-ing point and brake horsepower (kilowatts).j. Louver characteristic performance curve, if specified bypurchaser.

5.2.2 The vendor shall maintain records of the followingfor at least 5 years:

a. Certified material test reports for all pressure parts.b. Temperature recorder charts made during post-weld heattreatment of headers.

6 Design6.1 TUBE BUNDLE DESIGN

6.1.1 General Requirements

6.1.1.1 Tube Bundles shall be rigid and self contained andshall be designed for handling as a complete assembly.

6.1.1.2 Provision for a minimum lateral movement forexchanger tube bundles of 1/4 inch (6 millimeters) in bothdirections or 1/2 inch (13 millimeters) in one direction shall bemade by the vendor unless a greater movement is agreedupon by the purchaser and the vendor.

6.1.1.3 Provision shall be made to accommodate thermalexpansion of tubes.

6.1.1.4 All tubes shall be supported to prevent sagging andmeshing or deformation of fins. Tube supports shall be spacednot more than 6 feet (1.83 meters) from center to center.

6.1.1.5 A hold-down member (tube keeper) shall be pro-vided at each tube support. Hold-down members shall beattached to side frames by bolting.

6.1.1.6 Tubes of single pass condensers shall be slopeddownward a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (10 millimeters permeter) to the outlet header.

6.1.1.7 Tubes of multi-pass condensers need not be sloped.

6.1.1.8 Air seals shall be provided throughout the tubebundle and the bay to minimize air leakage and bypassing. Ingeneral, any air gap that exceeds 3/8 inch (10 millimeters) inwidth and which results in by-passing of the heat transfer sur-face shall be considered excessive.

6.1.1.9 The minimum thickness of metal used for air sealconstruction shall be 12 gauge United States Standard (USS),0.105 inch (2.8 millimeters) within the bundle side frame and14 gauge USS, 0.075 inch (2.0 millimeters) outside the bun-dle side frame.

6.1.1.10 Bolts for removable air seals shall be at least 3/8

inch (10 millimeters) nominal diameter.

6.1.1.11 Winterization considerations are covered inAppendix G.

6.1.1.12 The exchanger shall be designed for an internalsteam-out operation at the temperature, pressure and operat-ing conditions specified by the purchaser.

6.1.2 Heating Coils

6.1.2.1 Heating coils provided for protection of the processtube bundle against freeze-up shall be in a separate bundle nota part of the process bundle.

6.1.2.2 Heating coils shall cover the full width of the pro-cess tube bundle.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 18: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

10 API STANDARD 661

6.1.2.3 Tube pitch of the heating coil shall not exceedtwice the tube pitch of the process bundle.

6.1.2.4 Heating coils shall be single pass, and the tubesshall be sloped downward a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (10millimeters per meter) to the outlet.

6.1.2.5 Pipe-type headers with welded-in tubes are accept-able for steam service.

6.1.3 Tube Bundle Design Temperature

6.1.3.1 The design temperatures (maximum and mini-mum) for pressure parts shall be as specified by the purchaser.

6.1.3.2 For pressure parts (excluding tubes) constructed ofcarbon or low-alloy steel as indicated in Section VIII, Divi-sion 1, Part UCS of the ASME Code, the maximum designtemperature shall be at least 650°F (343°C) unless otherwisedictated by flange ratings. In this case, the maximum designtemperature shall not be lower than the specified process fluidinlet temperature plus 50°F (28°C).

6.1.3.3 For pressure parts (excluding tubes) constructed ofmaterials other than indicated in 6.1.3.2, the maximum designtemperature shall be the specified process fluid inlet tempera-ture plus 50°F (28°C).

6.1.3.4 The design temperatures for pressure parts, aslisted on the air-cooled heat exchanger specification sheet, isnot intended to govern fin type selection or to apply in deter-mining exposure temperatures of mechanical and instrumen-tation components. The purchaser shall separately specify themaximum operating temperature to be applied for fin typeselection (fin design temperature).

6.1.4 Tube Bundle Design Pressure

6.1.4.1 The design pressure shall be as specified by thepurchaser.

6.1.4.2 If the design pressure is not specified, it shall bebased on the inlet pressure plus 10 percent or the inlet pres-sure plus 25 pounds per square inch (172 kilopascals), which-ever is greater.

6.1.5 Corrosion Allowance

6.1.5.1 The corrosion allowance shall be as specified bythe purchaser for all surfaces exposed to the process fluidexcept no corrosion allowance shall be provided for tubes,gaskets, and gasket contact surfaces.

6.1.5.2 If not specified, a 1/8 inch (3 millimeter) minimumcorrosion allowance shall be provided for carbon and low-alloy steel components.

6.1.5.3 The corrosion allowance shall be provided on eachside of pass partition plates or stiffeners.

6.1.5.4 A thickness equal to the depth of the pass partitiongroove may be considered as available corrosion allowanceon grooved cover plate and tube-sheet surfaces.

6.1.6 Headers

6.1.6.1 General

6.1.6.1.1 Provision shall be made in the design to preventexcessive warpage of tube-sheets and/or leakage at tubejoints. When defined by the purchaser, alternative operationssuch as low process flow at low ambient air temperature,freezing of fluids in tubes, steam-out, loss of fans due topower failure, and cycling conditions shall be included in theanalysis. Analysis shall consider maximum operating temper-ature and maximum cooling conditions at minimum ambientair temperature in the design of headers to prevent excessivewarpage of tube sheets and leakage at tube joints.

6.1.6.1.2 Where fluid temperature differential between theinlet and outlet of multi-pass bundle exceed 200°F (111°C),U-tube construction, split headers or other methods ofrestraint relief shall be employed.

6.1.6.1.3 The need for restraint relief in multi-pass bundlesshall be investigated regardless of the extent of the tempera-ture differential between the inlet and outlet of the bundle.The designer shall provide calculations to prove the adequacyof the design. Calculations shall consider the stress combina-tions in Appendix E.

6.1.6.1.4 Headers shall be designed to have the cross-sec-tional flow areas of each pass equal to at least 100 percent ofthe flow area in the corresponding tube pass.

6.1.6.1.5 The lateral velocity in the header shall not exceedthe velocity in the nozzle. Multiple nozzles or an increasedheader cross-sectional area may be required.

6.1.6.1.6 Nominal thickness of header components shallconform as a minimum to the following:

The thickness for any carbon or low-alloy steel componentincludes up to 1/8 inch (3 millimeters) corrosion allowance.The thickness for any component of high-alloy steel or othermaterial does not provide corrosion allowance.

6.1.6.1.7 The nominal thickness of carbon and low alloysteel pass partition plates and stay plates shall be at least 1/2

inch (12 millimeters). This thickness includes up to 1/8 inch (3

Carbon or Low Alloy Steel

High Alloys or Other

Component in. mm in. mm

Tubesheet 3/4 20 5/8 16

Plugsheet 3/4 20 5/8 16

Top, Bottom, and End Plates 1/2 12 3/8 10

Removable Cover Plates 1 25 1 25

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 19: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 11

millimeters) corrosion allowance on each side. The nominalthickness of high-alloy steel and other non-carbon steel mate-rials shall be at lease 1/4 inch (6 millimeters).

6.1.6.1.8 Pass partitions used as stay plates for the tube-sheet and plug-sheet shall be made of one integral plate. Incalculating the required thickness of the stay plate, a jointefficiency of 0.6 shall be used for the full penetration attach-ment weld which cannot be inspected.

6.1.6.1.9 Header types other than those described in 6.1.7and 6.1.8 may be proposed as an alternative design (see Sec-tion 9).

6.1.6.2 Headers—Removable-Cover-Plate and Removable-Bonnet-Types

6.1.6.2.1 The cover plate header design shall permitremoval of the cover without disturbing header piping con-nections.

6.1.6.2.2 The bonnet header design shall permit removalof the bonnet with minimum dismantling of header pipingconnections.

6.1.6.2.3 Bolted joints shall be designed with confinedgaskets or unconfined full-faced gaskets. Typical constructionis shown in Figure 4.

6.1.6.2.4 Cover plates, tube-sheets, and flanges shall bespot-faced or back-faced to the extent required by ANSIB16.5.

6.1.6.2.5 Either jackscrews or a 3/16 inch (5 millimeter)minimum clearance shall be provided at the cover peripheryto facilitate dismantling.

6.1.6.2.6 Stay bolts shall not be used.

6.1.6.2.7 Use of through bolts or stud bolts shall be a mat-ter of agreement between the purchaser and the vendor.

6.1.6.2.8 The minimum nominal diameter of stud boltsshall be 3/4 inch (20 millimeters); the minimum nominaldiameter of through bolts shall be 5/8 inch (16 millimeters).

6.1.6.2.9 The recommended maximum spacing betweenbolt centers shall be:

Bmax = 2dB + 6t/(m + 0.5)

Where:B = bolt spacing, inches.dB = nominal bolt diameter, inches.

t = flange thickness, inches.m = gasket factor used in the design of bolted flange

connections to the requirements of Appendix IIof Section VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code.

When the distance between bolt centerlines exceeds therecommended maximum spacing, the total flange momentdetermined by ASME Code design methods shall be multi-plied by a correction factor equal to à (B/Bmax).

6.1.6.2.10 The minimum spacing between bolt centersshall be as shown in Table 1.

6.1.6.2.11 Spacing between bolts straddling corners shallbe such that the diagonal distance between bolts adjacent tothe corner does not exceed the lesser of the spacing on thesides or the ends.

6.1.6.3 Plug Headers

6.1.6.3.1 Threaded plug holes shall be provided oppositethe ends of each tube for access. Holes shall be threaded fulldepth of the plug sheet or 2 inches, whichever is less.

6.1.6.3.2 The diameter of the plug holes shall be equal tothe nominal outside diameter of the tube plus a minimum of1/32 inch (0.8 millimeter).

6.1.6.3.3 Gasket contact surfaces of plug holes shall bespot-faced. The edges of the facing shall be free of burrs.

6.1.7 Tube Access Plugs

6.1.7.1 Plugs shall be of the shoulder type with straightthreaded shanks.

6.1.7.2 Hollowed plugs are not permitted.

Table 1—Minimum Flange Bolt Spacing

dB Bmin

Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters

5/8 16 11/2 38

3/4 19 13/4 44

7/8 22 21/16 52

1 25 21/4 57

11/8 29 21/2 64

11/4 32 213/16 71

13/8 35 31/16 78

11/2 38 31/4 83

15/8 41 31/2 89

13/4 44 33/4 95

17/8 48 4 102

2 51 41/4 108

Notes: dB = nominal bolt diameter; Bmin = minimum bolt spacing

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 20: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

12 API STANDARD 661

6.1.7.3 Plugs shall have hexagonal heads. The minimumdimension across the flats shall be at least equal to the plugshoulder diameter.

6.1.7.4 The pressure seal shall be maintained by means ofa gasket between the flange of the plug and the plug sheet.

6.1.7.5 Positive means (such as a self-centering taper or theequivalent) shall be provided to ensure seating of the gasketin the spot-face recess.

6.1.7.6 Plugs shall be long enough to fill the plug sheetthreads, with a tolerance of ±1/16 inch (1.5 millimeters) exceptfor galling materials or when the nominal plug sheet thick-ness is greater than 2 inches (50 millimeters). Alternativedesigns may be used with the approval of the purchaser.Additional factors to consider in selecting the plug design arethread interference, corrosion, erosion, crevice corrosion, andretention of fluid in cavities.

6.1.7.7 The thickness of the plug head from its gasket sur-face to the top face shall be at least 50 percent of the nominaltube OD. Greater thickness may be required due to pressurerating and material considerations.

6.1.7.8 Threads of plugs having nominal diameters 11/2

inches (40 millimeters) and less shall be Unified Fine Threadin accordance with ANSI B1.1.

6.1.7.9 Threads of plugs having nominal diameters greaterthan 11/2 inches (40 millimeters) shall be 12 Series.

6.1.8 Gaskets

6.1.8.1 Tube access plug gaskets shall be of the solid-metalor double-metal-jacketed filled type of the same generalmaterial classification as the plug.

6.1.8.2 Tube access plug gaskets shall be flat and burr free.

6.1.8.3 The minimum thickness of solid metal tube accessplug gaskets shall be 0.060 inch (1.5 millimeters).

6.1.8.4 Cover-plate and bonnet gaskets shall be of the dou-ble-metal-jacketed, filled type for joint types A and B, Figure4. Filler material shall be non-asbestos suitable for sealing,exposure resistance, and fire safety performances.

6.1.8.5 Compressed sheet composition gaskets suitable forthe service may be used for joint types B and C, Figure 4, atdesign pressures of 300 pounds per square inch gauge (2,100kilopascals) or lower. Gasket filler material shall be com-pressed non-asbestos suitable for sealing, exposure resis-tance, and fire safety performances.

6.1.8.6 The width of removable cover-plate and bonnetgaskets shall be at least 3/8 inch (9 millimeters).

6.1.8.7 Gaskets shall be of one piece.

6.1.9 Nozzles and Other Connections

6.1.9.1 Connections NPS 11/4, 21/2, 31/2, and 5 shall not beused.

6.1.9.2 Connections NPS 11/2 and larger shall be flanged.

6.1.9.3 All connections in hydrogen service (partial pres-sure of hydrogen 100 pounds per square inch absolute (690kilopascals or higher) shall be flanged. Slip-on flanges are notpermitted.

6.1.9.4 When design conditions require Class 900 orhigher flange ratings, all connections shall be flanged.

6.1.9.5 The minimum thickness including corrosion allow-ance of carbon steel and low alloy flanged connections NPS 4and smaller shall be Schedule 160; the minimum thicknessfor NPS 6 through 12 shall be Schedule 80.

6.1.9.6 Flange dimensions and facing shall be in accor-dance with ANSI B16.5.

6.1.9.7 The facing of process flanges shall be in a hori-zontal plane unless another arrangement is required by thepurchaser.

6.1.9.8 Flanged carbon steel connections shall be of one ofthe following types:

a. A forged or centrifugally cast integrally flanged weldingneck.

b. A pipe welded to a forged or centrifugally cast weldingneck flange.

c. A seamless transition piece attached to a forged or centrif-ugally cast welding neck flange.

d. A cast or fabricated transition, if approved by the pur-chaser.

e. A pipe or transition welded to a forged slip-on flange.

6.1.9.9 When a transition is used, stay bars, greater headerthickness, or greater nozzle thickness may be required to pro-vide adequate mechanical strength.

6.1.9.10 Forged carbon steel slip-on flanges may be usedon connections to headers that are limited to:

a. A maximum design pressure of 300 pounds per squareinch gauge (2,070 kilopascals).

b. A maximum design temperature of 850°F (455°C).

c. Services with corrosion allowance not exceeding 1/8 inch(3 millimeters).

6.1.9.11 Threaded connections shall be NPS 1 except pres-sure gauge connections shall be NPS 3/4.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 21: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 13

6.1.9.12 Threaded connections shall be one of the follow-ing types:

a. 6,000 pound (41,500 kilopascal) forged steel full couplingthreaded one end only. b. Proprietary forged steel fitting with integral reinforcement.c. Tapped holes for vent and drain connection where headerplate thickness permits.d. Equivalent boss connections.

6.1.9.13 When a thermowell connection is specified, itshall be located in the nozzle, except that if the nozzle is lessthan NPS 4, the connection shall be located on the headeradjacent to the nozzle.

6.1.9.14 When a pressure gauge connection is specified, itshall be located in the nozzle, except that if the nozzle is lessthan NPS 3, the connection shall be located on the headeradjacent to the nozzle.

6.1.9.15 Pipe threads shall be taper pipe threads in accor-dance with ANSI B1.20.1.

6.1.9.16 Chemical cleaning connection size, type, andlocation shall be specified by the purchaser.

6.1.9.17 Instrument connections, when specified, shall belocated in at least one inlet and outlet nozzle per bundleexcept none are required in intermediate nozzles of stackedbundles.

6.1.9.18 All threaded piping connections shall be closedwith a round head plug in accordance with ANSI B16.11.

6.1.9.19 Flanged auxiliary connections, where furnished,shall be closed with blind flanges. Gasket and bolting materi-als suitable for the operation specified shall be used.

6.1.9.20 Vent and drain connections shall be provided athigh and low points on each header. Header nozzles installedat high and low points may serve as vents and drains. Con-nections serving as vents and drains shall not extend into theheader beyond the inside surface.

6.1.9.21 If the header thickness will not permit minimumthread engagement of vent and drain plugs as specified inANSI B16.5, couplings or built-up bosses shall be furnished.

6.1.9.22 Bolts between connecting nozzles of stacked tubebundles shall be removable without moving the bundles.

6.1.10 Maximum Allowable Moments and Forces for Nozzles and Headers

6.1.10.1 Each nozzle in the corroded condition shall becapable of withstanding the simultaneous application of themoments and forces defined in Figure 8.

6.1.10.2 The design of each fixed or floating header, of thefixed header to side-frame connections, and of other support

members shall be such that no damage will occur due to thesimultaneous application of the sum of all nozzle loadings ona single header. The sum of all nozzle loadings on a singleheader will not exceed the following:

This recognizes that the application of the moments andforces per Figure 8 will cause movement and that this move-ment will tend to reduce the loads to the values given above.

6.1.10.3 The total of all nozzle loads on one multi-bundlebay shall not exceed three times that allowed for a singleheader.

6.1.10.4 See Appendix E for more information.

6.1.11 Tubes

6.1.11.1 The recommended minimum tube diameter is 1inch (25.4 millimeters) OD.

6.1.11.2 The maximum tube length shall be as specified bythe purchaser.

6.1.11.3 The wall thickness for tubes 1 inch (25.4 millime-ters) through 11/2 inches (38.1 millimeters) OD shall not beless than those listed below. For embedded fin tubes thisthickness is measured from the bottom of the groove.

a. Carbon steel or ferritic low-alloy steel (up to 9 percentchrome, inclusive): 0.083 inch (2.11 millimeters).b. High alloy (austenitic and ferritic) steel: 0.065 inch (1.65millimeters).c. Nonferrous: 0.065 inch (1.65 millimeters).d. Titanium: 0.049 inch (1.24 millimeters).

Greater wall thickness may be appropriate for severe ser-vices or certain tube configurations.

6.1.11.4 Tubes may be furnished on either a minimumwall or an average wall basis provided the wall thickness isnowhere less than that specified.

6.1.11.5 Tubes with or without a finned surface are accept-able.

6.1.11.6 The total unfinned length of a finned tubebetween tubesheets after assembly shall not exceed 1.5 timesthe thickness of one tubesheet.

6.1.11.7 Any finned tube construction shall be a matter ofagreement between the purchaser and the vendor. The type ofconstruction furnished shall be demonstrated by the vendor tobe suitable for the intended service conditions (taking intoaccount such factors as metal temperature, cycling, loss of

● †

Moments (pound-feet) Forces (pounds) (f)

Mx My Mz Tx Fy Fz

4500 6000 3000 2250 4500 3750

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 22: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

14 API STANDARD 661

Figure 8—Maximum Allowable Nozzle Loads

Mx

Fx

My

Fy

Mz

Fz

Fin tubes

Nozzle Size, NPS Moments, pound-feet Forces, pounds

Inches Millimeters Mx My Mz Fx Fy Fz

11/2 40 80 110 80 150 230 150

2 50 110 180 110 230 300 230

3 75 300 450 300 450 380 450

4 100 600 900 600 750 600 750

6 150 1580 2250 1200 900 1130 1130

8 200 2250 4500 1650 1280 3000 1800

10 250 3000 4500 1880 1500 3000 2250

12 300 3750 4500 2250 1880 3000 3000

14 350 4500 5250 2630 2250 3750 3750

1 pound-foot = 1.35 newton-meters.1 pound = 4.45 newtons.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 23: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 15

cooling, effect of environment, any specified abnormal oper-ating conditions, and so forth). The following are descriptionsof several types of commonly used finned tube construction:

a. Embedded—rectangular cross section aluminum finwrapped under tension and mechanically embedded in agroove 0.010 inch, ±0.002 inch (0.25, ±.05 millimeter) deep,spirally cut into the outside surface of a tube. Tube wall thick-ness is measured from the bottom of the groove to the insidediameter of the tube.b. Integral—an aluminum outer tube from which fins havebeen formed by extrusion, mechanically bonded to an innertube or liner.c. Overlapped footed—L-shaped aluminum fin wrappedunder tension over the outside surface of a tube, with the tubefully covered by the overlapped feet under and between thefins. The fin end at each end of the tube shall be secured toprevent loosening or unraveling of the fins by means of a castzinc collar 1/2 inch (13 millimeters) wide.d. Footed—L-shaped aluminum fin wrapped under tensionover the outside surface of a tube with the tube fully coveredby the feet between the fins. The fin end at each end of thetube shall be secured to prevent loosening or unraveling of thefins by means of a cast zinc collar 1/2 inch (13 millimeters)wide.e. Tubes on which fins are bonded to the outside surface byhot-dip galvanizing, brazing, or welding.

6.1.11.8 Minimum stock thickness for fins wrapped undertension or embedded shall be 0.014 inch (.35 millimeter) forfin heights not exceeding 1/2 inch (12 millimeters) and 0.016inch (0.40 millimeter) for fin heights exceeding 1/2 inch (12millimeters).

6.1.11.9 Flattening in the bend of U-tubes shall not exceed10 percent of the nominal OD of the tube.

6.1.11.10 The minimum tube wall thickness at the U-bendshall be calculated as follows:

Where:tb

= minimum tube wall thickness after bending,inches (millimeters).

t = tube wall thickness before bending, inches (mil-limeters).

OD = tube nominal outside diameter, inches (millime-ters).

Rm = mean radius of U-bend, inches (millimeters).

The calculated thickness, tb, shall not be less than the

specified wall thickness.

6.1.11.11 When U-bends are formed from tube materialswhich are relatively non-work-hardening and of suitable tem-per, tube wall thinning in the bends should not exceed a nom-inal 17 percent of the original tube wall thickness.

6.1.11.12 U-bends formed from tube material having lowductility, or materials which are susceptible to work-harden-ing may require special consideration. If cold workinginduces embrittlement or the susceptibility to stress corrosionin some materials and/or environments, then heat treatmentshould be considered.

6.2 AIR SIDE DESIGN

6.2.1 General Requirements

6.2.1.1 Such environmental factors as weather, terrain,mounting, and the presence of adjacent buildings and equip-ment influence the air-side performance of an air-cooled heatexchanger. The purchaser shall supply the vendor with allenvironmental factors pertinent to the design of the exchanger.These factors shall be taken into account in the air-side design.

6.2.1.2 The need for air flow control shall be as defined bythe purchaser on the basis of specific process operationrequirements, including the effect of weather. Various meth-ods of controlling air flow are available. The type ultimatelyselected is dependent on the degree of control required, thetype of driver and transmission, equipment arrangement, andeconomics. The various methods include, but are not limitedto, simple on-off control, on-off step control (in the case ofmultiple-driver units), two-speed motor control, variable-speed drivers, controllable fan pitch, manual or automaticlouvers, and air recycling.

6.2.1.3 Fan selection at design conditions shall be such thatat constant speed the fan is capable of providing, by anincrease in blade angle, a 10 percent increase in air flow with acorresponding pressure increase. Since this requirement is toprevent stall and inefficient operation of the fan, the resultingincreased power requirement need not govern the driver rating.

6.2.1.4 The design exposure temperatures for mechanicalcomponents may be estimated by the vendor, using conven-tional heat transfer analyses, and be submitted for approval bythe purchaser. Alternatively, these temperatures may be esti-mated by the following methods:

a. The design exposure temperature for mechanical andinstrumentation components located above the tube bundleshall be equal to or greater than the higher of the maximumprocess or heating coil inlet temperature (not mechanicaldesign temperature) minus 50°F (28°C) for units with lou-vers or automatically controlled pitch or speed fans andminus 100°F (56°C) for other designs. In no case shall thedesign exposure temperature be less than the design dry bulbtemperature.

tbt

1OD

4 Rm-------------+

----------------------------=

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 24: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

16 API STANDARD 661

b. The design exposure temperature for mechanical andinstrumentation components located below the tube bundleshall be equal to or greater than the higher of the maximumprocess or heating coil inlet temperature (not mechanicaldesign temperature) minus 100°F (56°C) for units with lou-vers or automatically controlled pitch or two-speed fans andminus 200°F (111°C) for other designs.c. Items using air recirculation systems require examinationof design exposure temperatures for each operating mode(start-up, normal operation, shutdown, loss of power, stag-nated air flow, one fan inoperable, etc.).

6.2.2 Noise Control

6.2.2.1 The heat exchanger operating in the specified ser-vice with fans operating at design speed and pitch shall notexceed the following noise limits as specified by the purchaser:

a. Sound pressure level (SPL) values per fan at the locationdesignated by the purchaser.b. Sound power level (PWL) values per fan.

A typical noise data sheet is shown in Appendix C.

6.2.2.2 The order of preference for obtaining the requirednoise data is as follows:

a. Actual testing of a representative bay in an environmentremote from other noise sources (shop or field tests) orinstalled in an operating plant. b. Derived noise data obtained by testing similar equipmentand adjusting the data for the actual equipment size and oper-ating conditions. Both measured data and correction proce-dure shall be reported.

6.2.2.3 The procedure for determining noise levels shall beper Appendix F.

6.2.3 Fans and Fan Hubs

6.2.3.1 Two or more fans aligned in the direction of tubelength shall be provided for each bay except single fanarrangements are acceptable when agreed to between pur-chaser and vendor.

6.2.3.2 Fans shall be of the axial-flow type.

6.2.3.3 Fans shall be sized so that the area occupied by thefan is a minimum of 40 percent of the bundle face area servedby that fan.

6.2.3.4 Fans shall be located so that the dispersion angleshall not exceed 45 degrees at the bundle centerlines, asshown in Figure 9.

Plenum

45°Max.

45°Max.DispersionAngle

45°Max.

45°Max.

Fan Ring

Forced draft

Induced draft

C of bundleL

Side Front

Figure 9—Fan Dispersion Angle

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 25: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 17

6.2.3.5 Fan tip speed shall not exceed 12,000 feet perminute (61 meters per second) except that greater tip speedsmay be used if approved by the purchaser. In no case shall fantip speed exceed 16,000 feet per minute (81 meters per sec-ond). Noise limitations may require lower speeds.

6.2.3.6 Radial clearance between the fan tip and the fanorifice ring shall be in accordance with the following:

6.2.3.7 Detachable fan blades shall be moment balancedagainst a master blade.

6.2.3.8 Fan assemblies shall be balanced by one of the fol-lowing means:

a. Static or dynamic balancing as an assembly.b. Static or dynamic balancing of the hub and moment bal-ancing of the blades.c. Hubs of automatically controlled pitch fans shall bedynamically balanced.

6.2.3.9 The fan assembly shall be designed to preventreverse air flow at the hub.

6.2.3.10 Except for fans 5 feet or less in diameter, individ-ual fan blades are to be manually adjustable for varying bladepitch. The use of automatic control for varying blade pitchshall be as specified by the purchaser.

6.2.3.11 Fans equipped for pneumatically actuated, auto-matically controlled pitch adjustment of blades shall complywith the following:

a. Where more than one actuator is operated by a single con-troller, an isolating valve in the control signal line shall beprovided by the purchaser for each actuator to allow mainte-nance.b. The pneumatic actuator may be equipped with a positioneror a bias relay.c. If provided, the positioner or bias relay shall be designedto operate on a 3 to 15 pounds per square inch (20 to 100 kilo-pascals) pneumatic control signal. Each change in the controlsignal shall result in a corresponding change in the fan bladepitch. The operating range of the positioner shall be adjustedso that the maximum pitch obtained is equal to the selecteddesign blade angle setting. Maximum and minimum bladepitch limit stops shall be set by the fan manufacturer. Unless

otherwise specified by the purchaser, the minimum bladepitch limit will result in essentially zero air flow.d. The vendor shall furnish a flexible tubing connectionapproximately 12 inches (300 millimeters) long to the pur-chaser’s control air line. Tubing shall connect to a rigid steelor alloy pipe or tube that terminates outside the fan enclosure.Terminal fitting for connection to the purchaser’s control airline shall be NPS 1/4. Pipe threads shall be taper pipe threadsin accordance with ANSI B1.20.1.e. The direction of change of the fan pitch with loss of con-trol air pressure shall be specified by the purchaser.

6.2.3.12 Hub and fan assemblies with automatically con-trollable pitch adjustment employing lubricated joints shall bedesigned to minimize lubrication maintenance through theuse of bearings not requiring periodic re-lubrication.

6.2.3.13 The characteristic fan performance curve shallrelate static or total pressure, rate of flow, blade pitch, and faninput brake horsepower (kilowatts) for standard air condi-tions: dry air; dry bulb temperature, 70°F (21.1°C); pressure,29.92 inches of mercury (101.0 kilopascals); and density,0.075 pounds per cubic foot (1.201 kilograms per cubicmeter). The operating point and brake horsepower for thespecified design dry bulb and minimum design ambient tem-peratures shall be shown.

6.2.3.14 The natural frequency of the fan or fan compo-nents shall not be within 10 percent of the blade pass fre-quency. Blade pass frequency equals the number of bladesmultiplied by the fan speed in revolutions per minute dividedby 60.

Note: Slipping drive belts, low power supply voltage, or variable fan speedcontrol operation will cause fan speeds lower than design values. Where theblade pass frequency exceeds the natural frequency of the fan or component,the effect of such operation should be evaluated.

6.2.3.15 Fan blades, hubs, and blade retainers shall not beexposed to temperatures above the manufacturer’s recom-mended operating limit, whether the fan is at rest or in opera-tion. Where this limit exceeds 220°F (105°C) for nonmetallicor 290°F (143°C) for metallic components, the use of specialmaterials and/or design features should be considered by thepurchaser. Variable pitch fan components may further limitthe exposure temperature per 6.2.3.16.

6.2.3.16 Common elastomeric materials used in variablepitch fan components are limited to maximum exposure tem-perature as follows:

a. Pneumatic diaphragm actuators: 225°F (107°C).b. Pneumatic positioners: 180°F (82°C).c. Rotary unions: 250°F (121°C).

Higher exposure temperatures require suitable materialsand approval by the purchaser.

Fan diameter Minimum Maximum

3' through 9' 1/4" 1/2"

>9' through 11' 1/4" 5/8"

>11' through 16' 1/4" 3/4"

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 26: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

18 API STANDARD 661

6.2.4 Fan Shafts and Bearings

6.2.4.1 Anti-friction shaft bearings shall have a calculatedrating life, L10, of 50,000 hours per AFBMA-9 or AFBMA-11at maximum load and speed; where: L10, the rated life, is thenumber of hours at rated bearing load and speed, that 90 per-cent of the group of identical bearings will complete orexceed before the first evidence of failure.

6.2.4.2 The bearing design shall incorporate seals to pre-vent the loss of lubricant and entry of foreign materials.

6.2.4.3 Fan shaft diameter shall conform to bearing sizesper 6.2.4.1.

6.2.4.4 Fan shaft stresses shall not exceed the values givenin AGMA Standard 6001-C.

6.2.4.5 Fan shafts shall have keyseats per ANSI B17.1.

6.2.4.6 Fan bearing exposure temperatures above 260°F(121°C) require one or more special features such as hightemperature seals, heat stabilization, retainers, and modifiedinternal clearances. Lubricants shall be suitable for the designexposure temperature plus any temperature due to frictionand loading.

6.2.5 Lubrication Facilities

Connections shall be provided outside of the fan guards topermit grease lubrication of fan shaft bearings without shut-down of the equipment. Stainless steel tubing 1/4 inch (6.35millimeters) OD minimum, shall be used for grease lines. Theconnections shall be accessible from grade or service plat-forms. The length of the grease line should be minimized.

6.2.6 Fan Guards

6.2.6.1 Removable steel fan guards shall be furnished onforced-draft units.

6.2.6.2 Flattened expanded metal for fan guards shall notexceed 2 inch (50 millimeter) nominal mesh size.

6.2.6.3 Minimum thickness of expanded metal mesh shallbe not less than the following:

6.2.6.4 The openings in woven or welded mesh for fanguards shall not exceed an average area of 4 square inches(2,600 square millimeters) if the wire spacing in both direc-tions exceeds 1 inch (25 millimeters).

6.2.6.5 The thickness of wire for welded or woven meshshall not be less than 12 Birmingham Wire Gauge (BWG),0.109 inch (2.8 millimeters).

6.2.6.6 Fan guards shall be designed with stiffening mem-bers such that a concentrated load of 200 pounds (90 kilo-grams) on any square foot shall not cause fastener failure orstiffener deflection greater than L/90. Where L= the length ofthe span between points of support, inches.

6.2.6.7 The minimum distance from the fan guard to thefan blade at its maximum operating pitch shall be 6 times thesmaller of the opening dimensions or 6 inches (150 millime-ters), whichever is less.

6.2.6.8 Gaps between guard and equipment or betweensections of guard shall not exceed 1/2 inch (13 millimeters).

6.2.7 Drivers

6.2.7.1 General Requirements

6.2.7.1.1 The vendor shall furnish all drive equipmentunless otherwise specified by the purchaser.

6.2.7.1.2 For electric motor drivers, the rated brake horse-power (bhp) Kilowatts (KW) available at the motor shaft, andfor steam turbine drivers, the rated brake horsepower at theturbine coupling, shall be the greater of the following:

Pdr ≥ 1.05 (Pf1/Em)

Pdr ≥ 1.10 (Pf2)

Where:Pdr = driver rated brake horsepower (kilowatts).Pf1 = fan brake horsepower (kilowatts) operating at

specified minimum design temperature withblade angle set for design dry bulb temperature.

Em = mechanical efficiency of separate power trans-missions.

Pf2 = fan brake horsepower (kilowatts) operating atdesign dry bulb temperature.

These requirements apply to fixed pitch, variable pitch, andvariable speed fans unless otherwise specified.

6.2.7.2 Electric Motor Drivers

6.2.7.2.1 Electric motors for air-cooled heat exchanger ser-vice shall be 3 phase, 60 hertz, 460 volt, totally-enclosed fan-cooled, chemical duty severe service type, 1.15 service factor,Class F insulation, suitable for full voltage starting, continu-ous duty, and 80°C temperature rise over 40°C ambient atnameplate horsepower. If electric area classification or otherconditions require alternative construction, the purchasershall so specify.

Normal Size Minimum Thickness

In. mmManufacturer’s

Designation In. mm

11/2 40 11/2 #13 0.070 1.8

2 50 2 #9 0.110 2.8

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 27: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 19

6.2.7.2.2 The motor manufacturer shall be advised that themotor is intended for air-cooled heat exchanger service andoperation outdoors, unprotected from weather conditions.The manufacturer shall verify in writing that the motor is suit-able for vertical position operation, either shaft up or shaftdown, when so used.

6.2.7.2.3 Motor frames shall be of cast steel or corrosionresistant cast iron, with integrally cast support feet.

6.2.7.2.4 The motor design loading shall exclude the ser-vice factor allowance.

6.2.7.2.5 Motors shall have grease lubricated bearingsdesigned for an L10 life of no less than 40,000 hours undercontinuous duty at rated load and speed. The bearing lubrica-tion system and seals shall be suitable for a verticallymounted motor, when so mounted. (See 6.2.4.1 for L10 defini-tion).

6.2.7.2.6 When the motor is mounted in the shaft up posi-tion, the belt sheave shall be designed as a shield to preventwater from accumulating and being directed down the motorshaft while either idle or running. Alternatively, an externalconical slinger may be fitted to the shaft to prevent waterfrom entering the housing along the shaft.

6.2.7.2.7 Motors shall be provided with drains at the low-est point of the frame as actually mounted on the air-cooledheat exchanger.

6.2.7.2.8 Standard motors are designed for a 104°F (40°C)ambient temperature. Necessary motor features for highertemperature exposure shall be provided. Higher temperaturesmay require improved insulation or an increase in motorframe size. The motor manufacturer shall be notified of theambient temperature at the motor if it will exceed 104°F.

6.2.7.3 Steam Turbine Drivers

Steam turbine drivers shall conform to API Standard 611.The purchaser shall specify those items in the reference stan-dard on which a decision is required.

6.2.8 Couplings and Power Transmissions

6.2.8.1 General Requirements

6.2.8.1.1 All bushings and couplings shall be either a splittaper or cylindrical fit and shall be keyed. Cylindrical fitsshall be in accordance with ANSI B4.1, Class FN 1.

6.2.8.1.2 Power transmission components shall have arated horsepower (kilowatts) for continuous service which isat least equal to the rated brake horsepower of the actualdriver times the component service factor.

6.2.8.1.3 Fan shaft and gear shaft couplings shall be thenon-lubricated type and shall have a minimum service factorof 1.5.

6.2.8.1.4 Exposed moving parts shall be provided withguards per 6.2.8.4.

6.2.8.1.5 Figure 7 shows typical drive arrangements.

6.2.8.2 Belt Drives

6.2.8.2.1 Belt drives shall be either conventional V-belts orhigh-torque type positive drive belts.

6.2.8.2.2 Top-mounted belt drives should not be used.

6.2.8.2.3 Belt drives shall be provided with guards per6.2.13.

6.2.8.2.4 Belt drives shall be provided with jack screws orequivalent means of initial belt tensioning and/or re-tensioning.

6.2.8.2.5 V-belt drives shall conform to MPTA-RMA-RAC Engineering Standard IP-20, MPTA-RMA-RAC Engi-neering Standard IP-22, or API Specification 1B.

6.2.8.2.6 V-belts may be either matched sets of individualbelts or a multiple-belt section formed by joining a matchedset of individual belts.

6.2.8.2.7 High-torque type positive drive belts may beeither one belt or a pair of matched belts.

6.2.8.2.8 V-belts shall have a minimum service factor of1.4, based on driver rated brake horsepower (kilowatts).

6.2.8.2.9 High-torque type positive drive belts shall have aminimum service factor of 1.8, based on driver rated brakehorsepower (kilowatts).

6.2.8.2.10 V-belt drive assemblies suspended from thestructure may be used with motor drivers rated up to andincluding 30 horsepower (22 kilowatts).

6.2.8.2.11 High-torque type positive drive belt driveassemblies suspended from the structure may be used withmotor drivers rated up to and including 50 horsepower (37kilowatts).

6.2.8.2.12 The drive belt jacket shall be oil resistant asdefined in RMA Technical Bulletin IP-3-2.

6.2.8.2.13 Standard drive belt materials are limited to anexposure temperature of 140°F (60°C). Higher exposure tem-peratures reduce the belt life.

6.2.8.3 Gear Drives

6.2.8.3.1 Right-angle gear drives shall be used with allelectric motors rated above 50 horsepower (37 kilowatts).

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 28: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

20 API STANDARD 661

6.2.8.3.2 Gear drives may be suspended from the structurewith electric motors rated up to and including 50 horsepower(37 kilowatts).

6.2.8.3.3 Right angle gear drives shall be used with allsteam turbine drivers.

6.2.8.3.4 Gears shall be of the spiral-bevel type. They shallhave a minimum service factor of 2.0 in accordance withAGMA 420.04.

6.2.8.3.5 Top-mounted gear drives shall not be used.

6.2.8.3.6 Gears shall be provided with external gauge oillevel indication visible from the maintenance platform.

6.2.8.3.7 The vendor shall provide information concern-ing the expected gear lubrication oil temperature, viscositygrade of oil provided initially, and other lubrication recom-mendations.

6.2.8.4 Mechanical Power Transmission Guards

6.2.8.4.1 Guards for mechanical components shall be pro-vided in accordance with OSHA Rules and RegulationsD1910.211, D1910.212, and D1910.219.

6.2.8.4.2 Guards shall be constructed to provide readyaccess to equipment for maintenance.

6.2.8.4.3 Gaps between guard and equipment shall notexceed 1/2 inch (13 millimeters).

6.2.9 Vibration Cutout Switches

6.2.9.1 One readily accessible double throw two contactvibration cutout switch shall be provided for each fan driverunit when specified by the purchaser.

6.2.9.2 Vibration cutout switches shall be of the manualexternally reset type not requiring disassembly of the switchfor resetting and shall have sensitivity adjustment.

6.2.10 Louvers

6.2.10.1 Louver blade material shall be at least 16 gaugeUSS, 0.060 inch (1.5 millimeters) for carbon steel and 0.090inch (2.3 millimeters) for aluminum.

6.2.10.2 Frames of carbon steel shall be at least 10 gaugeUSS, 0.135 inch (3.4 millimeters); frames of aluminum shallbe at least 0.160 inch (4.1 millimeters).

6.2.10.3 Unsupported louver blade length shall not exceed7 feet (2.1 meters).

6.2.10.4 The maximum allowable deflection of louverblades in the closed position shall be L/180 with a uniformdesign load of 40 pounds per square foot (196 kilograms persquare meter). Where L = the length of the span betweenpoints of support, inches.

6.2.10.5 The maximum allowable deflection of louver sideframes shall be L/360 with a uniform design load of 20pounds per square foot (98 kilograms per square meter).Where L = the length of the span between points of support,inches.

6.2.10.6 Deflection of louver blades and side frames shallbe evaluated at a metal temperature equal to maximum pro-cess inlet temperature minus 100°F (56°C), but not less thanthe specified air inlet dry bulb temperature.

6.2.10.7 The gap between the louver blade and the frameat the header ends shall not exceed 1/4 inch (6 millimeters).

6.2.10.8 The gap between the louver blades and the frameat the louver sides shall not exceed 1/8 inch (3 millimeters).

6.2.10.9 Louver blade pivot pins shall be designed for theirload but shall be not less than 3/8 inch (9 millimeters) diameter.

6.2.10.10 Bearings designed for exposure temperature per6.2.1.4 shall be provided at all pivot points including controlarm, torque rod, and blade pivot pins. Bearings shall notrequire lubrication. Exposure temperature shall not exceed300°F (149°C) for PTFE base composite bearing material per7.2.7. Higher temperature bearing materials are available butrequire purchaser’s approval.

6.2.10.11 Louver linkages shall be designed so that equalmovement of all louver blades results from a change of actua-tor position. The maximum acceptable deviation is 1/8-inch(3-millimeters) measured as a gap between any two bladeswith louver actuator in fully closed position. The means oftransmitting force between the louver actuator and the bladesmust be adequate to withstand, without damage, the maxi-mum possible force which may be applied by the actuator inany blade position and in either direction.

6.2.10.12 Actuation of louver sections shall not requiremore than 6 inch-pounds of work per square foot of face areato achieve full travel.

6.2.10.13 The minimum travel of louver blades shall be 70degrees (fully closed to open).

6.2.10.14 All shaft connections shall be attached at adjust-able linkage points by keys, splines, or equivalent positivemethods. Set screw connections are prohibited.

6.2.10.15 When used for automatic control, louver actua-tors shall be designed to operate with 3 to 15 pounds persquare inch gauge (20 to 100 kilopascals) pneumatic controlsignal. Actuators shall be sized to supply at least 150 percentof the necessary force for full range louver blade travel whensupplied with design motive air pressure. Motive air designpressure shall be 60 pounds per square inch gauge (413 kilo-pascals) unless otherwise specified.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 29: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 21

6.2.10.16 A positioner shall be provided at each actuatorunless otherwise specified.

6.2.10.17 Where more than one actuator is operated by asingle controller, an isolating valve in the signal line shall beprovided by the purchaser for each actuator to allow mainte-nance.

6.2.10.18 The location of the actuator and positionerassembly shall not interfere with access to the header, andboth shall be readily accessible for maintenance from a ser-vice platform, if one is provided. The assembly is to belocated out of the hot air streams if the exit air temperature atany condition exceeds 160°F (71°C). Alternative materialsare required for higher exposure temperatures.

6.2.10.19 The louver position with loss of control air pres-sure shall be specified by the purchaser.

6.2.10.20 All louvers not automatically or otherwiseremotely operated shall be provided with extensions or chainsto permit manual operation from grade or platform exceptthat extensions or chains shall not be used where their lengthwill exceed 20 feet (6 meters). Handles for manual operatorsshall not project into walkways or access ways in any operat-ing position.

6.2.10.21 A locking device shall be provided for manualoperators to maintain louver position. Set screw or thumbscrew locking devices are prohibited. A means of indicatinglouver position “open” or “closed” shall be provided.

6.2.10.22 The louver characteristic performance curveshall relate the percent of air flow to the angle of the louverblade.

6.2.10.23 All requirements apply to both parallel andopposed action louvers unless otherwise specified.

6.2.10.24 Due to the nature of their design, louvers arevulnerable to damage in handling. The use of spreader barsand anti-racking procedures is recommended. Specific han-dling instructions shall be included on the louver assemblydrawing. The louver shall be marked at one lift point with asuitable handling procedure.

6.2.11 Screens

When specified, hail screens, bug screens and lint screensshall be as agreed upon between purchaser and vendor.

6.3 STRUCTURAL DESIGN

6.3.1 General Requirements

6.3.1.1 Structural steel design, fabrication, and erectionshall be in accordance with the AISC Specification for theDesign, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel forBuildings, the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges, and the AISI Specification for theDesign of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

6.3.1.2 Bolts for load bearing members shall be designedand installed in accordance with the Specification for Struc-tural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts, endorsed byAISC.

6.3.1.3 Weld metal design stress shall conform to AWSD1.1, Section 8.

6.3.1.4 Structural members should be designed to excludefield welding.

6.3.1.5 For induced draft units, tube bundles shall beremovable without removing the platforms, if specified by thepurchaser. For forced draft design, the bundles shall beremovable without separately supporting or dismantling thefan, plenum, or platforms and without disturbing the structureor adjacent bays.

6.3.1.6 Suspended drives shall be attached to the structureby through bolts to permit disassembly.

6.3.2 Vibration Testing

6.3.2.1 Structural members shall be designed to minimizevibration. The maximum permissible amplitude of vibrationat design fan speed and horsepower shall be 0.006 inch (0.15millimeter) peak-to-peak as measured on primary structuralmembers and machinery mounts for either shop or field tests.

6.3.2.2 Verification of compliance to vibration limits shallbe by shop test, when specified.

6.3.2.3 Wind velocity at test conditions shall not exceed 10miles per hour (16 kilometers per hour).

6.3.3 Structural Design Loads and Forces

6.3.3.1 The following loads and forces shall be taken intoaccount in the design:

a. Dead loads—Dead loads shall consist of the total weightof the material furnished by the vendor plus the weight of anyfireproofing. If fireproofing is to be considered, the purchasershall state the extent and weight.b. Live loads—These shall consist of movable loads, includ-ing personnel, portable machinery, tools, equipment, andoperating load in equipment and piping. Design live loads onplatforms and walkways (exclusive of loads from piping andequipment in place) used for the design of platforms and col-umns shall be:

1. Floor plate or grating—100 pounds per square foot(490 kilograms per square meter).2. Floor framing—50 pounds per square foot (245 kilo-grams per square meter) or a moving concentrated load of500 pounds (225 kilograms).

● †

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 30: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

22 API STANDARD 661

3. Columns and brackets—25 pounds per square foot(120 kilograms per square meter) or a moving concen-trated load of 500 pounds (225 kilograms).4. Ladders or stairways shall be capable of supporting amoving concentrated load of 500 pounds (225 kilograms).

c. Impact loads—The vertical design impact load for liftingdevices furnished by the vendor shall be 2.0 times the weightof the heaviest piece of equipment to be lifted. The lateralimpact load shall be 0.35 times the weight to be lifted.d. Thermal forces—These shall include forces caused bypartial or complete anchorage of piping or equipment, slidingor rolling friction of equipment, and expansion or contractionof the structure. Acceptable forces shall be a matter of agree-ment between the purchaser and the vendor.e. Test load—Load due to the filling of equipment with waterfor testing.f. Wind load—Wind design load shall be in accordance withANSI A58.1.g. Earthquake forces—Earthquake design shall be in accor-dance with the Uniform Building Code unless otherwise spec-ified. Horizontal force factor K value shall be 2 per Table No.23-I of the Uniform Building Code.h. Nozzle loads—Nozzle loads shall include all forces andmoments applied to the nozzle face, such as dead weight ofpipe, thermal forces, fluid weight in the piping, etc. The totalmagnitude and direction of these forces and moments shall bein accordance with 6.1.10 unless otherwise specified. i. Fan thrust: Fan thrust shall be the maximum thrust basedon static pressure shown on the specification sheet times 1.25.(This is to account for velocity pressure.)j. Snow load—Snow load shall be applied when specified bythe purchaser. The snow load in pounds per square foot (kilo-grams per square meter) shall be applied to the total air-cooled heat exchanger plot area.k. Other loads—Loads, forces, or moments other than thosedescribed in the preceding paragraphs that are to be supportedby or applied to the air-cooled heat exchanger shall be speci-fied in terms of exact type, location, magnitude, and directionby the purchaser. Examples of such loads are auxiliary pipesupports, ladders and walkways furnished by others, tempo-rary scaffolding supports, and special transportation loads. l. Loading combinations—All structural components shallbe designed to support combinations of loads and forces towhich they may be subjected during erection, testing, orflushing of equipment or during normal operations. The fol-lowing combination of loads and forces shall be consideredfor the design of columns, bracing, anchor bolts, and founda-tions and for checking stability against overturning. However,loading conditions of a special nature shall at all times receiveproper consideration. (All loads and forces are additive.)

1. Erection:• Dead load of structure, less fireproofing.

• Dead load of equipment less piping, or dead load ofequipment less platforms supported by the equip-ment, whichever is greater.

• Full wind or earthquake, whichever is greater.2. Testing or flushing equipment:

• Dead load of structure, plus fireproofing.• Dead load of equipment, including platforms sup-

ported by the equipment.• Nozzle loads.• Test loads.• A 10 pounds per square foot (49 kilograms per

square meter) wind load.• Applicable live loads from platforms and walk-

ways specified under 6.3.3.1.b. However, whendesigning anchor bolts and checking stabilityagainst wind or earthquake, no such live loadsshall be included.

3. Normal operations:• Dead load of structure.• Dead load of equipment, including platforms sup-

ported by the equipment, including platforms sup-ported by the equipment.

• Nozzle loads.• Operating weight of fluid in equipment.• Unbalanced forces from impact.• Applicable live loads specified under 6.3.3.1.b.

However, when designing anchor bolts and check-ing stability against wind or earthquake, no suchlive loads shall be included.

• Full wind or earthquake, whichever is greater.

6.3.4 Plenums

6.3.4.1 Figure 6 shows typical plenum arrangements.

6.3.4.2 Box-type plenums employing panel constructionshall be designed to form an integral part of the structure.

6.3.4.3 Bank arrangements for field assembled units maybe designed to employ common walls between adjacent ple-nums.

6.3.4.4 The plenums between the fan and the bundle shallbe partitioned to prevent recirculation of air from operatingfans through non-operating fans.

6.3.4.5 For plenum partition requirements for recirculationsystems, see Appendix G.

6.3.4.6 Minimum thickness of steel sheet material used inthe construction of plenums shall be 14 gauge USS, 0.075inch (2.0 millimeters) flat or 16 gauge USS, 0.060 inch (1.6millimeters) ribbed.

6.3.4.7 The minimum plenum height shall be obtainedfrom information provided in paragraph 6.2.3.4 and Figure 9.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 31: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 23

6.3.4.8 Fabricated steel fan decks shall be designed for alive load of 50 pounds per square foot (245 kilograms persquare meter), except that minimum metal thickness shall be12 gauge USS, 0.105 inch (2.7 millimeters).

6.3.5 Mechanical Access Facilities

6.3.5.1 The number and location of header access plat-forms, interconnecting walkways, and ladders shall be speci-fied by purchaser.

6.3.5.2 When specified, maintenance platforms shall beprovided beneath each drive assembly to provide access forremoval and replacement of all drive components. An unob-structed platform area shall be provided, extending not lessthan 2 feet (600 millimeters) in any plan dimension on allsides of the driver and drive components. However, such plat-forms shall not extend beyond the bay plan limits.

6.3.5.3 Platforms shall have a minimum clear width of 2feet 6 inches (760 millimeters).

6.3.5.4 Floor plate shall have raised pattern and a mini-mum thickness of 1/4 inch (6 millimeters). Grating orexpanded metal may be used if approved by the purchaser.

6.3.5.5 Ladders, railings, toe plates, safety cages, and thelike shall be steel construction in accordance with local regu-lations and with OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Stan-dards, 29 Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910.21,1910.22, 1910.23, and 1910.27 except as indicated in6.3.5.5.1 through 6.3.5.5.3:

6.3.5.5.1 Safety cages shall be provided for ladders with aheight of over 10 feet (3 meters).

6.3.5.5.2 Chains with safety hooks or safety gates shall beprovided across ladder openings at platforms.

6.3.5.5.3 Ladders over 6 feet (2 meters) high shall providefor side-step access to platforms unless otherwise specified.

6.3.5.6 Header platforms shall be provided with a toeboardon the side next to the exchanger. If the gap between the plat-form and the exchanger is greater than 6 inches (150 millime-ters), a knee rail shall be added.

6.3.5.7 If pipe railings are not galvanized, they shall besealed to prevent internal corrosion.

6.3.6 Lifting Devices

6.3.6.1 At least two lifting lugs shall be provided on eachside frame of tube bundles and each louver section sideframe. Lifting lugs on side frames of adjacent bundles shallbe located so as not to interfere during bundle installation.

6.3.6.2 Two lifting lugs shall be provided on removablecover plates and bonnets.

6.3.6.3 Solid-forging or plate-type lifting lugs shall be usedfor tube bundle side frames, louver side frames, cover plates,and bonnets. The opening in the lug shall be at least 11/2

inches (38 millimeters) in diameter.

6.3.6.4 At least one lifting eye shall be provided on driversand gears.

6.3.6.5 Lug or eye design shall be based on a total loadequal to twice the weight of the lift.

6.3.6.6 Structural member with load attachment pointsshall be provided to permit their use for removal and replace-ment of driver components.

7 Materials7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

7.1.1 All materials shall be new.

7.1.2 Materials for pressure components shall conform toSection VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code and the pur-chaser’s specification.

7.1.3 Use of cast Iron for pressure components is not per-mitted in flammable or lethal services.

7.1.4 Bolting material for pressure-retaining parts shall beof at least Grade B7 quality as defined in Section II, SA-193,of the ASME Code.

7.1.5 Nuts for pressure-retaining parts shall be of at leastGrade 2H quality as defined in Section II, SA-194, of theASME Code.

7.1.6 Structural steel shall conform to ASTM carbon steelspecifications.

7.1.7 Structural supports, such as side frames and beams,that are part of the tube bundle and not accessible for mainte-nance shall be galvanized unless otherwise specified.

7.1.8 Additional galvanizing of structural steel shall be asspecified.

7.1.9 Hot-dip galvanizing shall conform to the applicablesection of ASTM A123, A143, A153, A384, and A385. Thesespecifications require complete seal welding of all structuralsteel joints of sufficient separation to permit complete pene-tration of galvanizing.

7.1.10 Bolting for galvanized structural steel shall beeither galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 or zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM B633 requirements forType LS coating.

● †

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 32: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

24 API STANDARD 661

7.2 HEADERS

7.2.1 External load-bearing parts welded to headers shallbe of a material listed in the ASME Code, Section II, Part Aor B.

7.2.2 Welded header pass partitions and stiffeners shall beof the same material specification as the header plate; withthe purchaser’s approval, welded pass partitions or stiffenersof suitable alloy steel may be used in carbon steel headers toavoid excessively thick sections.

7.2.3 Tube access header plug material shall be compatiblewith header material; cast iron shall not be used for plugmaterial.

7.2.4 Tube access header plugs of carbon steel bar stockmaterial or individual forged plugs shall be certified to meetthe melting process, chemical composition, and mechanicalproperty requirements of ASME SA-105.

7.2.5 Louvers

7.2.6 Louver blade pivot pins shall be 300 series stainlesssteel or aluminum 6063-T6.

7.2.7 Louver bearings shall be of polytetrafluoroethylene(PTFE) base composite material containing at least 20 per-cent fill for exposure temperatures of up to 300°F (149°C), orapproved alternative if required by higher design temperature.

7.2.8 Steel louver blades and frames shall be galvanized. Ifmill-galvanized material is used, all cut and punched edgesshall be protected with a zinc-rich coating.

7.3 OTHER COMPONENTS

7.3.1 Fin material shall be aluminum unless otherwisespecified or approved by the purchaser.

7.3.2 Fan blades shall be of aluminum alloy or fiberglassreinforced plastic unless otherwise specified.

7.3.3 Plugs for threaded connections shall be made of amaterial with an alloy content at least equal to that of the con-nection.

7.3.4 Plenums, fan decks, partitions, platforms, and fanrings shall be of carbon steel unless an alternative material isspecifically approved by the purchaser.

7.3.5 Metal gasket material shall be softer than the gasketcontact surface.

7.3.6 Solid metal gaskets for shoulder plugs shall have aBrinell hardness no higher than 120 Hb for carbon steel and160 Hb for 300 series stainless alloy steel.

8 Fabrication8.1 WELDING

8.1.1 General

8.1.1.1 Header welding shall be in accordance with Sec-tion VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code and the purchaser’sspecifications.

8.1.1.2 Welding procedures and welders shall be qualifiedin accordance with Section IX of the ASME Code.

8.1.1.3 Except as noted in 8.1.3.1 for header flanges, allheader welds subject to pressure, shall be full-penetration andfull-fusion welds. All header welds, other than connection-to-header welds, shall be double-welded joints, except that whenone side of a weld on a pressure part is not accessible, single-welded joints are acceptable provided full penetration isobtained.

8.1.1.4 Single-welded joints without backing strips shalluse metal-added inert gas process (MIG), tungsten inert gasprocess (TIG), or low hydrogen shielded metal arc electrodesfor the root pass.

8.1.2 Plug Headers

8.1.2.1 Partition plates shall be seal welded to abuttingplates and shall be welded from both sides; full penetrationattachment welding may be used.

8.1.2.2 When pass partition plates are also used as stiffen-ers, a full-penetration attachment weld shall be used.

8.1.3 Removable-Cover-Plate and Removable-Bonnet-Type Headers

8.1.3.1 Unless otherwise specified, removable-cover-plateand removable-bonnet-type header flanges on units with adesign temperature 500°F (260°C) or lower may be installedwith partial-penetration double welding. The unfused areabetween the welds shall be vented to atmosphere by a holeapproximately 1/8 inch (3 millimeters) in diameter.

8.1.3.2 Flanges on units with a design temperature above500°F (260°F) shall be installed with full-penetration welding.

8.1.3.3 Partition plates and stiffeners shall be welded fromboth sides, full length, along the three edges.

8.2 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT

8.2.1 All carbon steel and low-alloy steel headers shall besubjected to postweld heat treatment. Welded tube-to-tube-sheet joints shall be excluded from postweld heat treatment.

8.2.2 Gaskets of ferritic materials fabricated by weldingshall be fully annealed after welding.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 33: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 25

8.3 TUBE-TO-TUBE-SHEET JOINTS

8.3.1 Tube Hole Diameters and Tolerances

8.3.1.1 Tube holes in tube sheets shall be finished to thesizes and undertolerances shown under Standard Fit inTable 2.

8.3.1.2 For work-hardening materials that are used for cor-rosion resistance, a closer fit between tube OD and tube holeID may tend to minimize work hardening and attendant lossof corrosion resistance. Such closer fit will be provided asshown under Special Close Fit in Table 2, when specified bythe purchaser.

8.3.1.3 No more than 4 percent of the total number of tubeholes in a tube sheet may exceed the Overtolerance in Table2. No tube holes shall exceed the nominal tube hole diametergiven in Table 2 by more than 0.01 inches (0.25 millimeters).

8.3.2 Tube Hole Grooving

8.3.2.1 All tubesheet holes for expanded joints in tubesheets less than 1 inch (25 millimeters) thick shall bemachined with one groove approximately 1/8 inch (3 millime-ters) wide by 1/64 inch (0.4 millimeter) deep. A second grooveshall be provided for tube sheets 1 inch (25 millimeters) orgreater in thickness.

8.3.2.2 Tube hole grooves shall be square-edged, concen-tric, and free of burrs.

8.3.2.3 Grooves shall be located at least 1/8 inch (3 millime-ters) plus corrosion allowance from the process face of thetube sheet and at least 1/4 inch (6 millimeters) from the air-side face of the tube sheet.

8.3.3 Expanded Tube-To-Tube Sheet Joints

8.3.3.1 Tubes shall be expanded into the tubesheet for alength at least the smaller of the following:

a. Two inches (50 millimeters).b. The tube-sheet thickness minus 1/8 inch (3 millimeters).

In no case shall the expanded portion extend beyond theair-side face of the tube-sheet.

8.3.3.2 The expanding procedure shall provide substan-tially uniform expansion throughout the expanded portion ofthe tube without a sharp transition to the unexpanded portion.

8.3.3.3 The ends of tubes shall extend at least 1/16 inch (1.5millimeters) and not more than 3/8 inch (9 millimeters)beyond the tube-sheet.

8.3.4 Welded Tube-To-Tube-Sheet Joints

8.3.4.1 Tube-to-tube-sheet joints may be welded whenboth tubes and tube-sheets, or tube-sheet facing, are of suit-able materials and welding is approved by the purchaser.

8.3.4.2 When welding is used for sealing the tube-to-tube-sheet joint and customary tube loads are carried by theexpanded joint (seal welded joint), the joints shall be subjectto the rules of 8.3.1 through 8.3.3.

8.3.4.3 When welded tube joints are used as a completesubstitute for expanded joints, strength welded joint, modifi-cation of the requirements of 8.3.1 through 8.3.3 by agreementbetween the vendor and the purchaser may be considered.

8.4 GASKET CONTACT SURFACES

8.4.1 Final machining of gasket contact surfaces forremovable cover plates shall be done after any post-weld heattreatment.

8.4.2 Gasket contact surfaces of removable bonnet-typeheaders and cover plate type headers shall be true planes

Table 2—Nominal Tube Hole Diameters and Tolerances

Standard Fit Special Close Fit

NominalTube OD

Nominal Tube Hole Diameter Undertolerance

Nominal Tube Hole Diameter Undertolerance Overtolerance

Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters

3/4 19.05 0.760 19.30 0.004 0.10 0.758 19.25 0.002 0.05 0.002 0.05

1 25.40 1.012 25.70 0.004 0.10 1.010 25.65 0.002 0.05 0.002 0.05

11/4 31.75 1.264 32.11 0.006 0.15 1.261 32.03 0.003 0.08 0.003 0.08

11/2 38.10 1.518 38.56 0.007 0.18 1.514 38.46 0.003 0.08 0.003 0.08

2 50.80 2.022 51.36 0.007 0.18 2.018 51.26 0.003 0.08 0.003 0.08

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 34: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

26 API STANDARD 661

within 1/32 inch (1 millimeter). The flatness of tube-sheet gas-ket contact surfaces shall be measured after expanding orwelding of the tube-sheet joints.

8.4.3 Tube access plug gasket contact surfaces shall bemachined to a finish of roughness height between 125 rootmean square (RMS) or 139 arithmetic average (AARH) and250 RMS or 278 AARH.

8.4.4 Special finish, if required, shall be specified by thepurchaser.

8.5 THREAD LUBRICATION

8.5.1 Tube access plug threads shall be coated with a suit-able thread lubricant.

8.5.2 Header flange bolting shall be assembled using athread lubricant suitable for the operating temperature.

8.6 ALIGNMENT AND TOLERANCES

8.6.1 Standard tolerances for the dimensions of air cooledheat exchangers and for nozzle locations are shown in Figure10. Tolerances apply to both forced- and induced-draft units.

8.6.2 Acceptable header warpage shall be 1/2-inch (12-mil-limeters) maximum or 1/16 inch per foot (1.5 millimeters per300 millimeters) of length as shown in Figure 10.

8.6.3 Bundles that are to be stacked in service shall beshop-checked for match tolerance.

8.6.4 Manufacturing tolerances shall be such that nomi-nally identical parts shall be interchangeable.

8.7 ASSEMBLY

8.7.1 Units shall be completely assembled for shipment,except when complete assembly is impractical, units shall bepartially shop assembled into the largest practical subunits tominimize field assembly work.

9 Inspection, Examination, and Test9.1 GENERAL

9.1.1 The materials, fabrication, conformance with design,and testing of heat exchangers shall be subject to inspectionfor acceptance by the purchaser, his designated representa-tive, or both.

9.1.2 The vendor shall give the purchaser the specifiednumber of days of notification prior to the start of fabrication,the date of hydrostatic test, and any other final inspection.

9.1.3 The inspector designated by the purchaser shall bepermitted entry to the vendor’s shop where and while thework is being performed. The vendor shall afford the inspec-tor reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the exchangers are

being furnished in accordance with the requirements speci-fied in the order.

9.1.4 All necessary certification of materials, shop testdata, and so forth to verify that the requirements of the speci-fication are being met shall be available to the inspector.

9.1.5 No unit shall be released for shipment without theapproval of the purchaser or his representative.

9.2 QUALITY CONTROL

9.2.1 On components subject to full radiography, nozzleattachment welds that cannot be readily radiographed percode shall be fully examined as follows: Roots pass and finalpass—magnetic-particle or liquid penetrant method for crackdetection after back chipping or flame gouging where appli-cable.

9.2.2 Radiographic examination method shall be per Arti-cle 2, Section V of the ASME Code; acceptance criteriaincluding repairs and retesting shall comply with SectionVIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code.

9.2.3 If full radiography is not specified, at least one spotradiograph shall be made of a longitudinal outside pressureweld and an end closure weld for each header. Process nozzleattachment welds shall be examined by the magnetic particleor liquid penetrant method for crack detection. Examinationshall apply to root pass after back-chipping or flame gouging(where applicable), and to the completed weld.

9.2.4 Spot radiographs shall include each start, stop andburn-through of weld made by the automatic submerged arcwelding process.

9.2.5 Spot radiographs shall be at least 10 inches (250 mil-limeters) long or full-length where the weld is less than 10inches (250 millimeters) in length.

9.2.6 Spot radiographs shall meet the slag and porositystandards of Section VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code for100 percent radiographed welded joints.

9.2.7 All root welds made in ferro-magnetic steels with aP-number (see Section IX, Table Q-11.1, of the ASME Code)of 3 or greater, including back-chipped root welds to bewelded from the second side, shall be examined by the mag-netic particle.

9.2.8 All finished welds of materials in ferro-magneticsteels with a P-number of 3 or greater shall be examined afterpost-weld heat treatment (unless the ASME Code specifiesafter pressure test) by either the magnetic particle or liquidpenetrant method as approved by the purchaser.

CAUTION: After post-weld heat treatment, only AC yoke orcoil magnetic particle examination methods shall be used toprevent arc strikes.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 35: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 27

Referenceline

±1/4 ±1/8

±1/8

±1/8

±1/16

±1/8

±1/8

±1/8

+1/8, –1/4 per 10' 0"

±1/8 per 10' 0" ±1/8 per 10' 0"

G

HeaderCL

NozzleCL

HeaderCLNozzleCL

Figure 10—Standard Tolerances

Nominal NozzleSize

GMax.

2"–4" incl. 1/16"

6"–12" incl. 3/32"

Over 12" 3/16"

Stacked, all 1/32"

Acceptable Metric Equivalents

In. 1/321/16

3/321/8 3/16

1/4 2 NPS 4 NPS 6 NPS 12 NPS

mm 1.5 2.5 3 5 6 50 100 150 300

1/8 inch per 10 feet. .3 mm per 3,000 mm 1/4 inch per 10 feet 6 mm per 3,000 mm

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 36: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

28 API STANDARD 661

9.2.9 Root and final welds not subject to full radiographyin all nonmagnetic materials, either of solid alloy or alloy-clad plate, shall be examined by the liquid penetrant method.

9.2.10 When set-on connections are used, the edge of thehole in the plate to which the connections are attached shallbe examined for laminations by means of a magnetic particleor dye penetrant test. Indications found shall be cleared tosound metal and then back-welded.

9.2.11 Magnetic particle examination and acceptance crite-ria shall comply with Appendix 6, Section VIII, Division 1 ofthe ASME Code.

9.2.12 Liquid penetrant examination and acceptance crite-ria shall conform to Appendix 8, Section VIII, Division 1 ofthe ASME Code.

9.2.13 Ultrasonic examination of welds, acceptance stan-dards, and repair requirements shall conform to Appendix 12,Section VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code.

9.2.14 Weld hardness examination requirements are as fol-lows:

a. Weld metal and heat affected zone of pressure-retainingwelds in components made from a material that has a P-num-ber of P-1, P-3, P-4, P-5, P-6, or P-7 shall be examined.

b. Hardness determination shall be made with a 10-millimeterdiameter indenter.

c. Examination shall be made after any required post-weldheat treatment.

d. Hardness shall not exceed 225 Brinell for P-1, P-3, and P-4 materials or 240 Brinell for P-5, P-6, and P-7 materials.

e. Representative welds, including connection-to-headerweld, shall be examined. Examination shall be made of onelongitudinal weld, one weld at an end closure, and each con-nection-to-header weld when the connection is NPS 2 orlarger. At least one header per item and every tenth headershall be examined.

9.2.15 For tubes with circumferential welds, the vendorshall demonstrate by means of a qualification procedure thatweld root reinforcement on the tube ID will not exceed 1/16

inch (1.5 millimeters). Permanent backing rings are not per-mitted.

9.2.16 Inspection of tubes with circumferential welds shallbe as follows:

a. A minimum of 10 percent of the welded joints selected atrandom shall be examined using radiography. One double-wall elliptical exposure for double-wall viewing is requiredper joint.

b. Sampling shall be done progressively throughout theperiod of fabrication.

9.2.17 Inspection of tubes shall be by either eddy currenttesting or hydro testing. If eddy current testing is used, theentire metal volume of the tube shall be used.

9.2.18 Bar stock material for tube access plugs shall beradially examined by an ultrasonic or radiographic method.Linear indications exceeding 3/8 inch (9 millimeters) are notacceptable.

9.2.19 Individually forged tube access plugs, either hot orcold forged, need not be examined per 9.2.18.

9.3 PRESSURE TEST

9.3.1 Hydrostatic tests shall be in accordance with SectionVIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code and/or the applicablelocal, state, or national government agency requirements, orboth, as specified by the purchaser.

9.3.2 Hydrostatic test pressure shall be maintained for aminimum of one (1) hour.

9.3.3 The minimum fluid temperature for the hydrostatictesting of units fabricated from ferritic materials shall be theminimum design metal temperature plus minimum 30°F(17°C).

9.3.4 Water used for hydrostatic testing of units in whichaustenitic stainless steel or Monel materials will be exposedto the test fluid shall be potable water having less than 50parts per million by weight chlorides.

9.3.5 Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, paint orother coatings may be applied over welds prior to the finalpressure test.

9.3.6 Joints which are taken apart after the pressure testshall be reassembled with new gaskets.

9.3.7 Other types of tests, such as halogen tests, shall bespecified by the purchaser.

9.4 SHOP RUN-IN

9.4.1 The extent of shop run-in tests of the driver, the driveassembly, and the fan of shop-assembled units shall be a mat-ter of agreement between the purchaser and the vendor.

9.5 NAMEPLATES

9.5.1 An austenitic stainless steel nameplate shall beaffixed to the inlet header of each tube bundle.

9.5.2 The nameplate shall be permanently mounted on abracket welded to the top of the header.

9.5.3 In addition to the markings required by Section VIII,Division 1 of the ASME Code, the nameplate shall includethe item number and the test pressure.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 37: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 29

9.5.4 The following parts shall be stamped with the ven-dor’s serial number:

a. Header.b. Cover-plate flange of cover-plate-type headers.c. Tube-sheet flange of bonnet-type headers.

10 Preparation For Shipment

10.1 GENERAL

10.1.1 All liquids used for cleaning or testing shall bedrained from units before shipment.

10.1.2 Tube bundles shall be free of foreign matter prior toshipment.

10.1.3 Exposed flanged connections shall be protected byeither of the following:

a. Gasketed steel covers fastened by the greater of the fol-lowing:

1. Fifty percent of the required flange bolting.2. Four bolts.

b. Commercially available plastic covers specifically designedfor flange protection.

10.2 SURFACES AND FINISHES

10.2.1 Surfaces to be painted shall be degreased (SSPCVolume 2, Chapter 2, SP1) and cleaned by wire brushing, orsimilar means, to remove loose scale, dirt, and other foreignmaterials (see Volume 2, Chapter 2, SP2 or SSPC Volume 2,Chapter 2, SP3).

10.2.2 Machined surfaces that will be exposed to the atmo-sphere in transit and subsequent storage shall be protectedwith an easily removable rust preventative.

10.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, carbon steel headersshall be prepared by a near-white sandblast (see SSPC Vol-ume 2, Chapter 2, SP10) and then coated with an inorganiczinc-rich primer to a dry film thickness of at least 0.002inches (0.05 millimeters).

10.2.4 Other than surfaces of tubes, all exposed ferroussurfaces not otherwise coated shall be given one coat of man-ufacturer’s standard shop primer before shipment.

10.3 IDENTIFICATION, CONDITIONING, AND NOTIFICATION

10.3.1 All parts shall be marked for identification and con-ditioned for shipment.

10.3.2 Each loose piece or assembly shall be properly pro-tected to prevent damage during normal shipping and han-dling.

10.3.3 The vendor shall advise the purchaser if bundles aretemporarily fixed to bundle frames for shipping purposes.Transit and erection clips or fasteners shall be clearly identi-fied on the equipment and the field assembly drawings toensure removal before commissioning of the exchanger.

10.3.4 The extent of skidding, boxing, crating, or coatingfor export shipment shall be specified by the purchaser.

11 Supplemental Requirements

11.1 GENERAL

11.1.1 This section discusses additional design, fabrica-tion, and examination requirements that shall apply whenspecified by the purchaser. In general, these supplementalrequirements should be considered when the design pressureexceeds 2,000 pounds per square inch gauge (13,800 kilopas-cals), when the plate thickness of a box-type header of an air-cooled heat exchanger exceeds 2 inches (50 millimeters), orwhen an exchanger is to be placed in a critical service.

11.2 DESIGN

11.2.1 Alternatives to plug-type header construction maybe proposed for design pressures exceeding 3,000 pounds persquare inch gauge (20,700 kilopascals).

Note: Threads are susceptible to deterioration and possible failure.

11.2.2 Header corner joint design shall provide for clearinterpretation of weld quality by radiographic examination.The vendor shall include in their proposal a drawing showingfull details of the proposed welded joint design.

11.2.3 All tubes not strength welded to the tube-sheet shallbe expanded and seal welded.

11.2.4 When recessed-type tube-to-tube-sheet welds (inthe tube holes) are used, additional tube-sheet thickness maybe required to provide for integrity of the expanded joint.

11.2.5 Nozzle connections to headers shall conform to Fig-ure UW16.1 (a), (b), (c), or (g) of Section VIII, Division 1 ofthe ASME Code. However, types (a) and (b) shall be madeonly to plates ultrasonically examined in the area of theattachment for a radial distance twice the thickness of theheader.

11.3 EXAMINATION

11.3.1 Ultrasonic examination of material is required forplate and forgings welded to other components when thethickness exceeds 21/2 inches (65 millimeters). Examinationand acceptance standards shall comply with SpecificationSA-435, Article 23, Section V of the ASME Code. Trans-ducer shall be 1/2 inch (12 millimeters). Any discontinuitylarger than 1 inch (25 millimeters) causing a loss of back

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 38: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

30 API STANDARD 661

reflection shall be repaired before attaching the connection atthat location.

11.3.2 Ultrasonic examination of material is required forall forgings exceeding 4 inches (100 millimeters) in thicknessexcept for bolted flat covers and standard flanges designed inaccordance with ANSI B16.5 or API Standard 605. Examina-tion shall be in accordance with Specification SA-388, Article23, Section V, Article 23, SA-388, of the ASME Code. Thecriteria for acceptance shall be agreed upon by the purchaserand the vendor.

11.3.3 Ultrasonic examination is required for weldsexceeding 21/2 inches (65 millimeters) in thickness.

11.3.4 Ultrasonic examination of all nozzle attachmentwelds is required.

11.3.5 When ultrasonic examination of plates, forgings,and welds has been performed, the purchaser shall be sup-plied with a report providing diagrams of the surfacesscanned, the indications obtained, the areas repaired, thenature of defects repaired, and the repair procedures used.The following information shall be provided:

a. The pulse-echo unit manufacturer, model, and dampingcontrol setting.b. The search unit manufacturer, model dimensions, and thesubstance—such as oil or water—that is used to couple thetransducer with the material being inspected.c. The frequency used and the test angle of the componentssurface.d. The wedge medium for angle beam examination.

11.3.6 All header welds and nozzle attachment welds shallbe 100-percent radiographed; the root and the final weldpasses shall be examined by the magnetic particle or liquidpenetrant method. For nozzle attachment welds not readilyexamined by radiography, ultrasonic examination may besubstituted.

11.3.7 Ultrasonic examination of all repaired welds shallbe made after post-weld heat treatment. The entire volume of

deposited weld metal shall be examined from two directions.Before the welds are examined, the adjacent base metal shallbe examined by means of a longitudinal beam with a 100-per-cent scrub for a distance of twice the plate thickness backfrom the weld. A diagram shall be prepared indicating allareas larger than 1/2 inch (13 millimeters) in diameter thatshow a loss of back reflection of 50 percent or more.

11.3.8 Prior to welding, a magnetic particle or liquid pene-trant examination shall be made of all edges and plate open-ings prepared for welding. Defects found shall be cleared tosound metal.

11.3.9 A magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examinationshall be made of all attachment welds, including supports andthe like.

11.3.10 A magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examina-tion shall be made of areas where temporary lugs have beenremoved; these areas shall be prepared for examination bygrinding.

11.3.11 After hydrostatic testing, all exterior pressure-retaining welds and all interior nozzle welds that are accessi-ble without disassembly shall be examined by the liquid pen-etrant method.

11.3.12 For pipe manifold type header construction, allboss to tube and tube to U-bend welds shall be 100-percentradiographed. Boss-to-header welds shall be externally mag-netic particle or liquid penetrant examined.

11.4 TESTING

11.4.1 A shop air test at 25 pounds per square inch gauge(175 kilopascals) shall be applied after tube-to-tube-sheetwelding and prior to tube expansion. Tube-to-tube-sheetjoints shall be examined for leaks with a soap solution.

11.4.2 After final pressure test, plug joints and all gasketedjoints shall be air tested at 25 pounds per square inch gauge(175 kilopascals) with a soap solution or by total immersionin a water tank.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 39: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

31

APPENDIX A—NOTES TO PURCHASER AND VENDOR

In conjunction with this standard, the checklist (seeAppendix B), the typical noise data sheet (see Appendix C),and the air-cooled heat exchanger specification sheet (seeAppendix D) are intended to provide all data necessary forthe description and design of air-cooled heat exchangers forgeneral refinery services. Current and continuing research isproviding improved computer techniques that depend heavilyon physical property data for the design of units in condens-ing services. The data sheets accommodate these superior rat-ing methods for units handling change-of-phase operationsand yet permit complete definition of a simple, single-phaseunit with a minimum of work.

Preparation of the data sheets is a mutual responsibility ofthe purchaser and the vendor. The purchaser (user or contrac-tor) is responsible for the pertinent data in Appendix B, inAppendix C, and if he elects to use it, in Appendix D.Appendix B specifies the purchaser’s explicit requirementsfor those items in the standard that offer alternatives. Appen-dix C defines the purchaser’s requirements for permissiblenoise levels.

Since the quality of the design for multiphase services isdependent upon the availability of the process and physicalproperty data, every effort should be made to supply maxi-mum information to the vendor. The transport properties shall

preferably be based on the total composition of each phaseincluding water, steam, air and hydrogen or other permanentgas when these components are parts of a homogeneousphase. If the liquid has immiscible phases, the liquid proper-ties are to be separately and completely specified for eachphase. If the transport properties do not include the men-tioned components when they are present, their concentra-tions in the process stream shall be stated. In the simple caseof a well-defined, no-change-of-phase service, the purchasermay use the specification sheet in Appendix D as the onlydocument for data transmittal.

The purchaser may submit the checklist and noise informa-tion to the vendor in a manner other than that indicatedherein. Because a broad complexity of multiphase servicesexists and because the availability of physical property datavaries widely, the purchaser may provide the vendor with thenecessary information in any easily understandable form.

The vendor is responsible only for the information inAppendix D. As much information as possible should be fur-nished on the vendor’s proposal specification sheet. Afterexchanger fabrication, the vendor shall complete the specifi-cation sheet in order that it may become a permanent “asbuilt” record that accurately describes the equipment.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 40: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 41: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

33

APPENDIX B—AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER CHECKLIST

This checklist is to be used for indicating specific requirement of purchaser when the standard provides a choice or designatesthat a decision must be made. These items are indicated by a bullet (•) in this standard. This completed checklist shall be consid-ered as part of the specification.

1.1 Applicable local rules and regulations: _____________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________

4.1.1 Special requirements: (e.g., hydrogen service; lethal service; wethydrogen sulfide service; low ambient temperature service; locationand obstruction to airflow; other heat sources; etc.) ______________________________________________________________

4.1.2 Number of copies of outline drawings, approved drawings andfinal records required: ________________________________ Yes No

4.2.8 Noise data sheet required? Yes No

4.2.9 Fan performance curve required? Yes No

5.1.5 Proposed welding procedures and qualifications for approval required? Yes No

5.1.6 Additional engineering information required: ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

5.2.1h Certified noise data sheet required? Yes No

5.2.1j Louver characteristic performance curve required? Yes No

6.1.1.12 Steam-out design temperature and pressure.

6.1.6.1.1 Analysis of alternative operations for excessive tube stressesrequired? Yes NoDetail: ____________________________________________

6.1.6.2.7 Cover plate bolting type: Through Bolt Stud Bolt

6.1.9.8d Cast or fabricated transitions allowed? Yes No

6.1.9.16 Chemical cleaning connection: Size ______; Type _______;Location _________________

6.2.1.1 Special environmental factors affecting air-side design: ________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.1.11.2 Maximum tube length: ____________

6.2.3.1 Single fan arrangements: Yes No

6.2.3.5 Fan tip speed: ___________________

6.2.3.11c Special blade pitch limit stop setting: ____________________

6.2.7.1.1 Driver supplier: Purchaser Vendor

6.2.7.2.1 Alternative electric motor construction: _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.2.10.23 Requirements applicable to parallel and opposed action louvers? Yes No

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 42: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

34 API STANDARD 661

6.3.1.5 Tube Bundles removable without removing platforms? Yes No

6.3.2.2 Shop test for vibration check required: Yes No

6.3.3.1 Fireproofing requirements: ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.3.3.1a Dead loads: ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.3.3.1d Thermal forces: _____________________________________________________________________________________

6.3.3.1f Wind load: _________________________________________________________________________________________

6.3.3.1g Alternative earthquake: _______________________________

6.3.3.1j Design snow load: __________________________________

6.3.3.1k Other design loads: ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.3.5.4 Grating or expanded metal floor plates acceptable? Yes No

6.3.5.5.3 Special ladder access: __________________________________________________________________________________

8.1.3.1 Cover-plate and bonnet header flange welding:Partial penetration Full penetration

8.3.1.2 Reduced tube hole diameter and under tolerance required? Yes No

8.4.4 Special finish for gasket contact surfaces: ___________________________________________________________________

9.1.2 Number of days of notification prior to the start of fabrication,testing, and inspection: _______________________________

9.2.3 Full radiography required? Yes No

9.3.1 Hydrostatic test requirements other than ASME: _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________

9.3.7 Special tests other than hydrostatic? Yes NoDetail: ______________________________________________________________________________________________

9.4 Shop run-in required? Yes NoDetail: ______________________________________________________________________________________________

10.3.4 Special preparation for export shipment? Yes NoDetail: ______________________________________________________________________________________________

11.1 Section 9 supplemental requirements which apply: _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 43: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

35

APPENDIX C—TYPICAL AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER NOISE DATA SHEET

SPL atDesignated Location (1) PWL per Fan

Octave BandCenter

Frequency

(A)Customer

Specs

(B)Vendor (2)Guarantee

(C)Customer

Specs

(D)Vendor (2)Guarantee

dB (A)

31

63

125

250

500

1000

2000

4000

8000

(1) Description of designated location:

(2) Method used for obtaining specified values

Paragraph 6.2.2.2a

Paragraph 6.2.2.2b

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 44: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 45: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

37

APPENDIX D—STANDARDIZED ELECTRONIC DATA EXCHANGE FILE SPECIFICATION

D.1 Scope

D.1.1 This appendix provides a standardized file format forthe electronic storage and transmittal of the data contained inthe API 661 Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger Specification Sheet.This standard format is also known as the neutral dataexchange file format.

D.1.2 The neutral data exchange file format allows groupswith different operating systems, software, hardware, anddata sheet forms to electronically exchange the data containedon an Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger data sheet. Unlike printeddata sheet forms, it is possible to import electronic data intodesign programs or other software systems.

D.1.3 Purchasers and manufacturers are encouraged to usethis specification to transfer data. The method of data transfer,such as Internet FTP, e-mail, bulletin board, etc., is notaddressed by this specification. The parties exchanging datamust agree on the transfer method.

D.1.4 The legal ramifications of exchanging data electroni-cally are subject to the policies established between the dataexchanging parties. The parties may also require data sheetsin paper format as legal documents.

D.2 File Format

D.2.1 The neutral data exchange file is an ASCII text file.The exchange file only uses ASCII decimal codes 0 through127, as these codes are common to multiple computer operat-ing systems.

D.2.2 The data exchanged is defined in Table D-1, “NeutralData Exchange File Specification.” Each data field is sepa-rated by a carriage return (ASCII code 13) and line feed(ASCII code 10) combination. If a data field is unknown, notapplicable, or contains a null value, the carriage return andline feed codes that would normally follow it must beincluded in the file. The neutral data exchange file thereforehas one line for each data field. The storage order must alsofollow the data order defined in this specification. For exam-ple data field number 20, defined as Item Number in thisspecification, will always be the 20th field, or line 20, in allneutral data exchange files.

D.2.3 Table D-1 defines the maximum length for each datafield. Data exceeding the defined maximum length may notbe processed correctly by the receiver’s program.

D.2.4 Each data field in this specification is characterized asnumeric, integer, date, or character in order to facilitate dataprocessing by the receiver’s program. These field types areshown in the “Data Type” column of Table D-1 as follows:

a. “C” is a character field. The contents are any ASCII char-acter from 0 to 127.b. “D” is a date field. Dates are in the form YYYYMMDD,with YYYY representing the year, MM the month, and DDthe day. For example, April 1, 1996 is represented as19960401.c. “I” is an integer field.d. “N” is a numeric field. The contents are numeric valuesexpressed in integer, floating point, or exponential format.

Data not conforming to the assigned data type may not beprocessed correctly by the receiver’s program.

D.2.5 The units of measure for numeric data are defined forboth the US and SI systems in the “Units/Contents” columnof Table D-1. The neutral file must conform to one of thesetwo measurement systems. Data field number 3, System ofUnits, defines the measurement system used in the neutralfile.

D.2.6 Character type data which have well defined optionsmust conform to a common nomenclature so they can be eas-ily processed by the receiver’s programs. The column “Units/Contents” in Table D-1 defines the nomenclature for thesedata fields. Each option is separated by a semicolon (“;”) inthis column. For example, a raised face weld neck flange canbe expressed many different ways on a data sheet. To facili-tate the correct interpretation by the receiver’s program, thesender must use the terminology “RFWN” to represent raisedface weld neck in the neutral data exchange file (referencedata field number 94). If the sender’s data does not match oneof the defined options, the field contents should be set to“OTHER” and the data output with a description to one of theremark fields.

D.2.7 Each item number, or data sheet, has its own neutraldata exchange file.

D.2.8 The use of a standard file naming convention mini-mizes the possibility of duplicate file names and facilitatesidentification of file contents. The file naming conventionused for the neutral data exchange file should be agreed to bythe data exchanging parties. However the naming conventionshown below is recommended because it is supported bymany operating systems. It is based on the DOS naming con-

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 46: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

38 API STANDARD 661

vention, which allows names up to 8 characters in length withan additional 3 character extension.

a. 1 to 6 characters for equipment item number. If the itemnumber is longer, use the last 6 characters, excludinghyphens, commas, etc.b. +1 character for revision number.c. +1 character for sequence number, such as alternate designidentifier. (Use ‘0’ if no sequence number. Note: ‘0’=zero.)d. +‘.’e. +3 character mnemonic representing sender’s name.

For example, if the ABC Manufacturing Company sent aneutral exchange file to Company X, and it contained the datafor Item 20-E-43089, data sheet revision B, then the file namewould be “E43089B0.ABC”. If they also submitted alternatedesign #1 for this item number and revision, then the filename for it would be “E43089B1.ABC”.

D.3 Revisions to Neutral Data Exchange File Format

D.3.1 This specification defines version 1.0 of the neutraldata exchange file format. Data field number 2, File FormatVersion Number, is currently equal to “V1.0”. Each revisionto this specification will have its own unique File Format Ver-sion Number. The data exchanging parties are responsible formaintaining compatibility with the latest format version.Revisions will be available at the API Publications Office.

D.3.2 Future editions may consider adoption of a PDXIcompatible format for this data exchange file.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 47: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 39

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 48: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

40 API STANDARD 661

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 49: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 41

Table D-1—Neutral Data Exchange File Specification

Data No. Description Data Width Data Type Units/Contents

1 File identifier 20 C AIR COOLED EXCHANGER

2 Neutral file format version number 10 C V1.0

3 System of units 2 C US; SI

4 Vendor’s name 30 C

5 Model number 30 C

6 Alternate design identifier 1 C This field is blank for base designs, and is only used when transmitting an alternate design. EX: A, B, or 1

7 Purchaser’s name 100 C

8 Purchaser’s job number 20 C

9 Purchaser’s reference number 40 C

10 Purchaser’s inquiry number 30 C

11 Purchaser’s purchase order 40 C

12 Vendor’s job number 20 C

13 Vendor’s reference number 40 C

14 Vendor’s proposal number 30 C

15 Contact or sender’s name 30 C

16 Plant location 60 C

17 Revision date 8 D YYYYMMDD

18 Revision 2 C

19 Service of unit 60 C

20 Item Number 50 C

21 Tube side fluid name 25 C

22 Tube side total flow 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

23 Tube side vapor flow in 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

24 Tube side vapor flow out 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

25 Tube side liquid flow in 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

26 Tube side liquid flow out 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

27 Tube side steam flow in 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

28 Tube side steam flow out 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

29 Tube side water flow in 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

30 Tube side water flow out 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

31 Tube side non-condensable flow in 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

32 Tube side non-condensable flow out 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

33 Tube side temperature in 13 N °F; °C

34 Tube side temperature out 13 N °F; °C

35 Tube side liquid density in 13 N lb/ft3; kg/m3

36 Tube side liquid density out 13 N lb/ft3; kg/m3

37 Tube side vapor density in 13 N lb/ft3; kg/m3

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 50: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

42 API STANDARD 661

38 Tube side vapor density out 13 N lb/ft3; kg/m3

39 Tube side liquid viscosity in 13 N cP; mPas

40 Tube side liquid viscosity out 13 N cP; mPas

41 Tube side vapor viscosity in 13 N cP; mPas

42 Tube side vapor viscosity out 13 N cP; mPas

43 Tube side vapor molecular weight in 13 N

44 Tube side vapor molecular weight out 13 N

45 Tube side non-condensable molecular weight in 13 N

46 Tube side non-condensable molecular weight out 13 N

47 Tube side liquid specific heat in 13 N Btu/lb-°F; kJ/kg-°C

48 Tube side liquid specific heat out 13 N Btu/lb-°F; kJ/kg-°C

49 Tube side vapor specific heat in 13 N Btu/lb-°F; kJ/kg-°C

50 Tube side vapor specific heat out 13 N Btu/lb-°F; kJ/kg-°C

51 Tube side liquid thermal conductivity in 13 N Btu/hr-ft-°F; W/m-°C

52 Tube side liquid thermal conductivity out 13 N Btu/hr-ft-°F; W/m-°C

53 Tube side vapor thermal conductivity in 13 N Btu/hr-ft-°F; W/m-°C

54 Tube side vapor thermal conductivity out 13 N Btu/hr-ft-°F; W/m-°C

55 Tube side latent heat 13 N Btu/lb; kJ/kg

56 Dew point 13 N °F; °C

57 Bubble point 13 N °F; °C

58 Pour point 13 N °F; °C

59 Freeze Point 13 N °F; °C

60 Tube side pressure in 13 N psig; kPa G

61 Tube side allowable velocity 13 N ft/sec; m/s

62 Allowable velocity minimum or maximum 3 C MIN; MAX

63 Tube side calculated velocity 13 N ft/sec; m/s

64 Tube side pressure drop allow 13 N psi; kPa

65 Tube side pressure drop calculate 13 N psi; kPa

66 Tube side fouling resistance 13 N hr-ft2-°F/Btu; m2-°C/W

67 Air flow rate/item, mass 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

68 Air flow rate/item, volumetric 13 N SCFM; Nm3/s

69 Mass velocity (net free area) 13 N lb/hr-ft2; kg/s-m2

70 Air flow rate per fan, actual conditions 13 N ACFM; m3/s

71 Face velocity 13 N SFPM; Nm/s

72 Air inlet temperature 13 N °F; °C

73 Air outlet temperature 13 N °F; °C

74 Minimum design ambient 13 N °F; °C

75 Altitude 13 N ft; m

Table D-1—Neutral Data Exchange File Specification (Continued)

Data No. Description Data Width Data Type Units/Contents

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 51: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 43

76 Static pressure 13 N in. water; kPa

77 Air side fouling resistance 13 N hr-ft2-°F/Btu; m2-°C/W

78 Heat exchanged 13 N Btu/hr; W

79 MTD 13 N °F; °C

80 MTD type: corrected or weighted 4 C CORR; WTD

81 Transfer rate, finned 13 N Btu/hr-ft2-°F; W/m2-°C

82 Bare tube rate, service 13 N Btu/hr-ft2-°F; W/m2-°C

83 Bare tube rate, clean 13 N Btu/hr-ft2-°F; W/m2-°C

84 Tube side design pressure 13 N psig; kPa G

85 Tube side vacuum pressure (include negative sign) 13 N psig; kPa G

86 Tube side test pressure 13 N psig; kPa G

87 Tube side minimum design metal temperature 13 N °F; °C

88 Tube side maximum design temperature 13 N °F; °C

89 Number of tube passes 35 C include tube count of each pass when irregular

90 Tube side corrosion allowance 13 N inch; mm

91 Number of tube side inlet connections 5 I

92 Tube side inlet connection size 13 N inch; inch

93 Tube side inlet connection rating 5 I 150; 300; 600; 900; 1500; 2500

94 Tube side inlet connection facing 6 C RFWN; RFLWN; RFSO; LJ; RTJWN; RTJLWN; BW; FFWN; FFLWN; OTHER

95 Number of tube side outlet connections 5 I

96 Tube side outlet connection size 13 N inch; inch

97 Tube side outlet connection rating 5 I 150; 300; 600; 900; 1500; 2500

98 Tube side outlet connection facing 6 C RFWN; RFLWN; RFSO; LJ; RTJWN; RTJLWN; BW; FFWN; FFLWN; OTHER

99 Number of tube side vent connections 5 I

100 Tube side vent connection size 13 N inch; inch

101 Tube side vent connection rating 5 I 150; 300; 600; 900; 1500; 2500; 3000; 6000

102 Tube side vent connection facing 7 C RFWN; RFLWN; RFSO; LJ; RTJWN; RTJLWN; BW; FFWN; FFLWN; CPLG; THDOLET; NPT; SCOLET; DRL&TAP; WLDBOSS; OTHER

103 No. of tube side drain connections 5 I

104 Tube side drain connection size 13 N inch; inch

105 Tube side drain connection rating 5 I 150; 300; 600; 900; 1500; 2500; 3000; 6000

106 Tube side drain connection facing 7 C RFWN; RFLWN; RFSO; LJ; RTJWN; RTJLWN; BW; FFWN; FFLWN; CPLG; THDOLET; NPT; SCOLET; DRL&TAP; WLDBOSS; OTHER

107 No. of T.I. connections 5 I

Table D-1—Neutral Data Exchange File Specification (Continued)

Data No. Description Data Width Data Type Units/Contents

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 52: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

44 API STANDARD 661

108 T.I. connection size 13 N inch; inch

109 T.I. connection rating 5 I 150; 300; 600; 900; 1500; 2500; 3000; 6000

110 T.I. connection facing 7 C RFWN; RFLWN; RFSO; LJ; RTJWN; RTJLWN; BW; FFWN; FFLWN; CPLG; THDOLET; NPT; SCOLET; DRL&TAP; WLDBOSS; OTHER

111 No. of P.I. connections 5 I

112 P.I. connection size 13 N inch; inch

113 P.I. connection rating 5 I 150; 300; 600; 900; 1500; 2500; 3000; 6000

114 P.I. connection facing 7 C RFWN; RFLWN; RFSO; LJ; RTJWN; RTJLWN; BW; FFWN; FFLWN; CPLG; THDOLET; NPT; SCOLET; DRL&TAP; WLDBOSS; OTHER

115 No. of chemical cleaning connections 5 I

116 Chemical cleaning connection size 13 N inch; inch

117 Chemical cleaning connection rating 5 I 150; 300; 600; 900; 1500; 2500; 3000; 6000

118 Chemical cleaning connection facing 7 C RFWN; RFLWN; RFSO; LJ; RTJWN; RTJLWN; BW; FFWN; FFLWN; CPLG; THDOLET; NPT; SCOLET; DRL&TAP; WLDBOSS; OTHER

119 Minimum wall thickness, nozzle 13 N inch; mm

120 Bay size (W x L) 20 C ft; m

121 Draft type 7 C FORCED; INDUCED

122 No. of bays/item 5 I

123 Bundles per bay 5 I

124 Bundle size (W x L) 20 C ft; m

125 Number of bundles connected in parallel 5 I

126 Number of bundles connected in series 5 I

127 Surface/item, finned 13 N ft2; m2

128 Surface/item, bare tube 13 N ft2; m2

129 Number of tubes/bundle 5 I

130 Number of tube rows 5 I

131 Tube outside diameter 13 N inch; mm

132 Tube wall thickness 13 N inch; mm

133 Type tube wall thickness 3 C Min; Avg

134 Tube length 13 N ft; m

135 Tube pitch 13 N inch; mm

136 Tube pattern 10 C TRIANGULAR; SQUARE; OTHER

137 Fin type 10 C EMBEDDED; EXTRUDED; OVER-LAPPED, FOOTED; NONE; OTHER

138 Number of fins 13 N per inch; per meter

139 Tube material 20 C

Table D-1—Neutral Data Exchange File Specification (Continued)

Data No. Description Data Width Data Type Units/Contents

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 53: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 45

140 Tube to tube-sheet joint 24 C ROLLED; FULL ROLLED; SEAL WELDED & ROLLED; STRENGTH WELDED; STRENGTH WELDED & ROLLED; OTHER

141 Fin material 30 C

142 Fin stock thickness 13 N inch; mm

143 Fin outside diameter 13 N inch; mm

144 Fin selection temperature 13 N °F; °C

145 Header type 40 C

146 Header material 20 C

147 Plug material 20 C

148 Gasket material 20 C

149 Bundle slope 13 N in/ft; mm/m

150 Pipe-rack beams, C-C 15 C ft; m

151 Structure mounting 8 C GRADE; PIPERACK; OTHER

152 Ladders, walkways, platforms 3 C YES; NO

153 Structure surf. prep. 40 C

154 Header surf. prep. 40 C

155 Fan manufacturer & model 50 C

156 No. fans/bay 5 I

157 Fan rpm 13 N

158 Fan diameter 13 N ft; m

159 No. of blades 5 I

160 Pitch adjustment 6 C MANUAL; AUTO; FIXED; OTHER

161 Percent automatic pitch 13 N %

162 Blade angle 13 N

163 Blade material 20 C

164 Hub material 20 C

165 BHP/fan @ design temp. 13 N bhp; kw

166 BHP/fan @ min. ambient 13 N bhp; kw

167 Maximum allowable tip speed 13 N ft/min; m/s

168 Calculated tip speed 13 N ft/min; m/s

169 Fan noise level, allowable 100 C

170 Fan noise level, calculated 100 C

171 Driver type 15 C ELECTRIC MOTOR; HYDRAULIC MOTOR; STEAM TURBINE; OTHER

172 Driver manufacturer & model 40 C

173 No. drivers/bay 5 I

174 Driver horsepower 13 N bhp; kw

Table D-1—Neutral Data Exchange File Specification (Continued)

Data No. Description Data Width Data Type Units/Contents

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 54: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

46 API STANDARD 661

175 Driver rpm 13 N

176 Service factor 13 N

177 Enclosure 30 C

178 Volt 3 I

179 Phase 1 I

180 Cycle 2 I Hz

181 Speed reducer type 16 C V-BELT; COG BELT; RIGHT ANGLE GEAR; DIRECT; OTHER

182 Manufacturer & model 30 C

183 Speed reducer, no./bay 5 I

184 Service factor 13 N

185 Speed ratio 10 C

186 Speed reducer support 9 C STRUCTURE; PEDESTAL; OTHER

187 Vibration switch 3 C YES; NO

188 Vib. switch enclosure 30 C

189 Louver material 20 C

190 Louver action control 6 C MANUAL; AUTO

191 Louver action type 8 C OPPOSED; PARALLEL

192 Heating coil, no. of tubes 5 I

193 Tube outside diameter 13 N in; mm

194 Tube material 20 C

195 Fin material and type 30 C

196 Fin thickness 13 N in; mm

197 Heating coil, ASME code stamp 3 C YES; NO

198 Heating fluid 20 C

199 Heating fluid flow 13 N lb/hr; kg/s

200 Heating fluid temp. in 13 N °F; °C

201 Heating fluid temp. out 13 N °F; °C

202 Inlet pressure 13 N psig; kPa G

203 Pressure drop allowed 13 N psi; kPa

204 Pressure drop calculated 13 N psi; kPa

205 Heating coil design temp. 13 N °F; °C

206 Heating coil design pressure 13 N psig; kPa G

207 Inlet nozzle size 13 N inch; inch

208 Outlet nozzle size 13 N inch; inch

209 Air re-circulation 18 C NONE; INTERNAL; EXTERNAL OVER SIDE; EXTERNAL OVER END; OTHER

210 Degree of control of outlet process temperature, (+) 13 N °F; °C

211 Degree of control of outlet process temperature, (–) 13 N °F, °C

Table D-1—Neutral Data Exchange File Specification (Continued)

Data No. Description Data Width Data Type Units/Contents

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 55: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 47

212 Action of fan pitch on control signal failure 7 C MINIMUM; MAXIMUM; LOCKUP

213 Action of louvers on control signal failure 6 C OPEN; CLOSE; LOCKUP

214 Actuator air supply 20 C

215 Fan actuator 10 C NONE; POSITIONER; BIAS RELAY

216 Louver location 6 C INLET; OUTLET; BYPASS

217 Louver positioner 3 C YES; NO

218 Louvers: Signal air pressure, from 13 N psig; kPa G

219 Louvers: Signal air pressure, to 13 N psig; kPa G

220 AV Fans: Signal air pressure, from 13 N psig; kPa G

221 AV Fans: Signal air pressure, to 13 N psig; kPa G

222 Louvers: Supply air pressure, max. 13 N psig; kPa G

223 Louvers: Supply air pressure, min. 13 N psig; kPa G

224 AV Fans: Supply air pressure, max. 13 N psig; kPa G

225 AV Fans: Supply air pressure, min. 13 N psig; kPa G

226 Tube bundle code stamped 3 C YES; NO

227 Plot space (W x L) 20 C ft; m

228 Weight per bay 13 N lb; kg

229 Weight per bay filled with water 13 N lb; kg

230 Weight of bundle 13 N lb; kg

231 Total Weight 13 N lb; kg

232 Shipping Weight 13 N lb; kg

233 Remarks 100 C

234 Remarks 100 C

235 Remarks 100 C

236 Remarks 100 C

237 Remarks 100 C

238 Remarks 100 C

239 Remarks 100 C

240 Customer specifications 100 C

Table D-1—Neutral Data Exchange File Specification (Continued)

Data No. Description Data Width Data Type Units/Contents

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 56: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

48 API STANDARD 661

12 2015

10

1714

11

189

7812712879818283

4571619

121120 122

212256 5758 59

64 6561 63

33 34

5560

66

25 23 26 2429 27 30 28

31 3243 45 44 4635 37 36 3847 49 48 50

51 53 52 5439 41 40 42

71747576

7267 or 68

697370

84868887

124123125

130126

151150

152153154

189

190191

192 193194195196

197198 199

200 201202

203 204205 206207 208

1451469089

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 57: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 49

12 2015

10

1714

11

189

129 134135136

137141142144

240

143 138

226

149147148

91 92 9395 96 9799 100 101103 104 105107 – 110 111 – 114

115 – 118119

139131 132

9498

102106

155156158

157159

162

160163 164165 166

167 168

171

173172

174

175 176177

178 179 180169 170

181

183182

184 185

186187

188

216217

218 219220 221

222 223224 225

231232

209

210 211

212213

214

215

227230228

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 58: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 59: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

51

APPENDIX E—ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR HEADER/TUBE RESTRAINT RELIEF

The following shall be calculated when nozzle loads, lat-eral header movements, or tube pass temperature differentialexists, to ensure design meets ASME Section VIII Division Ior other applicable design codes.

E.1 Tube stress and/or tube joint stress shall consider thefollowing:

a. Stress caused by pressure and temperature.b. Stress caused by nozzle forces and moments.c. Stress caused by differential tube expansion betweenrows/passes in the coil sections. d. Stress caused by lateral header movement.

Note: Some of the above stresses are additive and tube joint efficiency mustbe considered.

E.2 Header and nozzle stress shall consider the following:

a. Stress caused by temperature and pressure.b. Stress caused by nozzle forces and moments.c. Stress caused by lateral header movement. d. Stress caused by differential tube expansion betweenrows/passes in the coil sections.

Note: Set-in versus set-on nozzle attachment could greatly affect the above.

E.3 Header attachments and supports (includes coil sideframes and cooler structure) shall consider the following:

a. a. Stress caused by header weight with water.b. b. Stress caused by nozzle forces and moments.c. c. Stress caused by lateral header movement.d. d. Stress caused by tube expansion.

Note: There may be additional loads and stresses imposed on the tube bundlewhich may not have been stated above (seismic, etc.).

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 60: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 61: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

53

APPENDIX F—MEASUREMENT OF NOISE FROM AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 62: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 63: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

55

CONTENTS

Page

F.1 GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57F.1.1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57F.1.2 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57F.1.3 Instrumentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57F.1.4 Nomenclature and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

F.2 PROCEDURE FOR CONDUCTING NOISE TESTS ON AN ISOLATED SINGLE BAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57F.2.1 Procedure for Obtaining Noise Test Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57F.2.2 Calculations and Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60F.2.3 Reporting of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

F.3 PROCEDURE FOR CONDUCTING NOISE TESTS ON INSTALLED UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62F.3.1 Procedure for Obtaining Noise Test Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62F.3.2. Calculations and Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63F.3.3 Reporting of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

APPENDIX F.A MODEL FORMAT FOR NOISE TEST REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67APPENDIX F.B EXAMPLE NOISE TEST REPORT FOR AN ISOLATED

SINGLE BAY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75APPENDIX F.C EXAMPLE NOISE TEST REPORT FOR AN

INSTALLED UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

FiguresF-1 Isolated Single Bay Noise Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59F-2 Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger SPL Test Measurement Points for an

Induced-Draft Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64F-3 Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger SPL Test Measurement Points for a

Forced-Draft Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

TablesF-1 Test Point Coordinates for Figure F-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58F-2 Corrections for Background Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60F-3 Example of Reduction Procedures for Test on an Isolated Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 61F-4 Example of Reduction Procedures for Test on an Installed Unit . . . . . . . . . . 65

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 64: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 65: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

57

Measurement of Noise from Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers

F.1 General

F.1.1 PURPOSE

This appendix establishes standard procedures for measur-ing and reporting sound-pressure levels (SPL) and sound-power levels (PWL) of air-cooled heat exchangers.

F.1.2 SCOPE

This procedure applies to air-cooled exchangers used forgeneral refinery service, including both forced- and induced-draft type units. The procedures are based on testing completeair-cooled exchangers and are not intended for testing indi-vidual components such as fans, motors, gears, and so forth.Separate procedures are given for the following types of tests:

a. Test of an isolated single-bay air-cooled exchanger fordetermining sound-power levels and sound-pressure levels(Section F.2).b. Test procedures for conducting noise tests on a single bayof installed air-cooled exchangers (normally multibay instal-lations) (Section F.3).

F.1.3 INSTRUMENTATION

The following are the required instrumentation and appli-cable specifications to be used to perform the measurementsrequired:

F.1.4 NOMENCLATURE AND DEFINITIONS

F.1.4.1 Nomenclature

The following abbreviations are used in this recommendedpractice.

F.1.4.2 Definitions

bay: One or more tube bundles served by two or more fanscomplete with structure, plenum, and attendant equipment.

geometric center: Located at the center of a bay on aplane midway between the air inlet and the air outlet for bothforced-draft and induced-draft units. The geometric center isalso considered the acoustic center of a bay for calculations.

octave bands: The preferred frequency bands.sound level: The sound-pressure level when frequency is

weighted according to the standardized A, B, or C weightingused in sound-level meters. Only A weighted readings[dB(A)] are referenced in this procedure.

sound-power level: Ten times the logarithm to base 10of the ratio of the total acoustic power radiated by a soundsource: to the reference power of 10–12 watt.

sound-pressure level: Twenty times the logarithm tobase l0 of the ratio of the root mean square sound pressure tothe reference sound pressure of 2 x 10–5 newtons per squaremeter.

unit: One or more tube bundles in one or more bays for anindividual service.

Note: For additional definitions see API Publication EA 7301, Guidelines onNoise.

F.2 Procedure for Conducting Noise Tests on an Isolated Single Bay

F.2.1 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING NOISE TEST DATA

F.2.1.1 Description of Test Set-Up

The more accurate noise tests on air-cooled heat exchang-ers are those which are performed on a single bay withoutinterference from nearby noise or structures. Such accuracy isusually precluded on an operating installation but is attainable

Instrument Specification

Sound level meter, including microphone, Type I Precision

ANSI S1.4-1971 (R1976)

Octave band filter, Type E, Class II ANSI S1.11-1966 (R1975)

Acoustic calibrator of coupler type ANSI S1.4-1971 (R1976)

Wind screen ANSI S1.4-1971 (R1976)

Abbreviation Definition Unit

B Measuring distance from surface meterD Fan diameter meterdB Unit of measure for sound level decibeldB(A) Decibel weighted to correspond to

standard “A” scaledecibel

H Height of geometric center meterhp Horsepower —

Hz Hertz, sound frequency cycle/secondL Length of bay meterN Number of fans per bay —n Number of measurement positions

per source—

PWL Sound-power level decibelR Radius of hemisphere and

cylindermeter

S Surface area (measuring surface) square meters0 Reference area of 1 square meter square meterSPL Sound-pressure level decibelSPL Mean sound-pressure level decibelW Width of one bay meter

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 66: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

58 API STANDARD 661

at the point of assembly. Units which have typical overalldimensions of from 4 to 6 meters wide, 7 to 12 meters long, 2to 5 meters high are discussed here.

For test, the unit should be supported above grade highenough for reasonable air access during the test. An elevation3 to 6 meters from grade to air inlet is usually adequate tominimize ground effects. There are several optional pieces ofequipment which influence noise to a negligible degree andsuch pieces may be omitted from the assembly for noise testpurposes. Included in this category are louvers, walkways,and recirculation chambers. (The presence or absence ofrecirculation walls will have little effect on the total noiseemitted but may cause noise to be emitted in a different direc-tion or at a different location.)

In many cases tests will be conducted as units are com-pleted immediately prior to shipment. However, if noise lev-els are critical and a large number of units are involved,consideration should be given to testing a single unit earlyenough to permit design changes.

F.2.1.2 Test Conditions

The equipment should be operating as near as is practicalto design fan tip speed and motor horsepower. Since mosttests must be run at conditions other than design conditions, itis desirable to agree beforehand on the corrections to be madefor these variables. If the customer requires, the blade anglecan be set to duplicate design horsepower when temperatureor elevation differs appreciably from design. Refer toF.2.2.2.4 if corrections need to be made for test conditionswhich differ from design conditions.

F.2.1.3 Location of Test Measuring Points

A radius of 10 meters used to define imaginary hemispher-ical and cylindrical surfaces surrounding the equipment to betested is recommended. The test measuring points shall belocated on this surface. There should be nine points on thehemisphere and four points on the cylinder. (See Figure F-1and Table F-1 for the location of these test points.)

The geometric center is located at the center of the unit ona plane midway between the air inlet and air outlet for bothforced- and induced-draft units. A radius of 10 meters is rec-ommended; however the radius could range from 9 to 12meters with little effect on results. The test points should befar enough from the equipment to minimize near field distor-tions, yet near enough to allow positioning the microphone atthe various points on the imaginary enclosing surface. Allfans should be running during these tests.

In addition to the above readings, which are used to calcu-late PWL, a set of readings at a single point should be takenbelow each fan. On forced-draft units, the point should be ona horizontal plane 1 meter below the lower edge of the fanring. The maximum reading attainable on this plane should be

taken by placing the microphone no closer than 1 meter fromthe motor, machinery mount, or other members. On induced-draft units, this measurement point should be on a horizontalplane 1 meter below the finned tubes. Again, the maximumreading attainable on this plane should be taken while placingthe microphone no closer than 1 meter from the motor,machinery mount, or other members. [The noise meter shouldbe reading dB(A) while finding the maximum noise point.]Again, all fans should be running during these readings. Thisdata is taken for future reference in correlating PWL andsound level data and for estimating noise levels directlybelow the unit.

F.2.1.4 Checklist

A noise test will usually be run immediately before a unitis shipped. Therefore, all required steps must be performedand all pertinent data must be recorded, since it is impracticalto recall the equipment and rerun the test at a later date. Thefollowing steps should aid operators in preparing for a test:

1. Prepare all drawings and data forms prior to the test.Lay out the test points in the x, y plane and paint spots onthe working surface. Then, only the z dimension need bemeasured during the test.

2. Check that all noise test equipment is in working orderand calibrated. A discharged battery, a faulty connection,or similar problem has invalidated many tests.

3. Check that equipment necessary to position the micro-phone at all test points is on hand prior to beginning thetest.

4. Check the weather forecast. The test should not be runduring rain or while winds are above l0 miles per hour.

Table F-1—Test Point Coordinates for Figure F-1

Coordinatesa

Position x y z

1 0.0 0.0 +1.000R

2 0.0 +0.745R +0.667R

3 –0.745R 0.0 +0.667R

4 0.0 –0.745R +0.667R

5 –0.745R 0.0 +0.667R

6 –0.689R +0.689R +0.222R

7 –0.689R –0.689R +0.222R

8 –0.689R –0.689R +0.222R

9 –0.689R +0.689R +0.222R

10 0.0 +1.000R –0.500H

11 +1.000R 0.0 –0.500H

12 0.0 –1.000R –0.500H

13 –1.000R 0.0 –0.500H

aCoordinates x, y, and z for all positions are measured from an origin located at the geometric center of the unit.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 67: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 59

5. Do a preliminary check of motor amperes and volts toassure the operation of motors near design speed.6. Start the unit and check it for any unusual noises orproblems. Is either fan running backwards? Is there anyunusual belt noise, gear noise, motor noise, or bearingnoise? Are there any loose parts rattling?7. Be aware that toothed sheaves with lobed or toothedbelts create a dominant noise in the l,000 to 2,000 Hzrange.

F.2.1.5 Recording of Data

Prior to recording the data, a preliminary survey should beconducted with the sound level meter on the dB(A) setting. Ifthe noise levels for either the hemisphere or cylinder differ bymore than 6 dB(A), either additional measurement positions

should be used or the hemisphere and cylinder radius shouldbe increased. If the large difference results from the back-ground noise, it may be necessary to record background noiseat each measuring point. If it is not possible to measure thenoise emission at a particular point because of high back-ground noise, either the source of the background noiseshould be reduced or eliminated or the measurement from asimilar point may be used. The latter procedure is not recom-mended, and any such similar point shall be noted in the testreport.

Record all data as required on the data sheet (see F.2.3 andAppendixes F.A and F.B). The calibration readings shall berecorded at the start and finish of a noise test. Backgroundreadings shall be taken at every fifth test point (more often ifeither party feels conditions warrant it). All sound level read-

Figure F-1—Isolated Single Bay Noise Measurement Points

8

1

5 2,4 3

11

6,78,9

13 10 12

12

7

11

10

13

9

2

6

3

4

5

Geometriccenter

R

0.975 R

0.745 RX

YZ

x

x

xx x

xx x

x x

x

x x x

x

x

x

xx

x

x

H +

0.2

22 R

0.5

H H

Geometric centerplane

Grade

H +

0.6

67 R

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 68: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

60 API STANDARD 661

ings should be taken with the meter set to “slow” responseand with a wind screen over the microphone.

F.2.2 CALCULATIONS AND INTERPRETATION

F.2.2.1 Reducing Test Data

F.2.2.1.1 Correction for Background Noise

If the test point reading exceeds the background level bymore than 10 dB, no correction of the test point reading isrequired. When the difference between the noise level andthe background is less than 3 dB, the measurements have nosignificance and valid test results cannot be obtained. If thedifference between the test point reading and the back-ground level is greater than 3 dB but less than or equal to 10dB, the measured noise level shall be corrected according toTable F-2.

F.2.2.1.2 Determining Mean Sound-Pressure Levels

Adjust the test point readings at each location for back-ground noise. For dB(A) plus each of the nine frequencies,determine SPL for both the hemisphere and the cylinder. Themean sound-pressure level (SPL)values are determined usingthe following calculations.

If the maximum difference between values to be averagedis greater than 6 dB, SPL is derived from the followingequation:

If the maximum difference between the values to be aver-aged is 6 dB or less, SPL is derived from the followingequation:

F.2.2.1.3 Sound-Power Level

Convert the representative SPLs to PWLs. This is done foreach of the nine frequencies plus the overall dB(A). It is doneseparately for the hemisphere and for the cylinder.

To convert SPL to PWL for the hemisphere or cylinder usethe following equation:

Where:S = the surface area of the hemisphere or cylinder, in

square meters.s0 = a reference area of l square meter.

2πR2 = area of hemisphere.2πRH = area of cylinder.SPLbay = sum of PWL for the hemisphere and the cylinder.

To add PWLs use:

Sound-power level per fan can be determined as follows:

PWLfan = PWLbay – 10 log N

Where:N = the number of fans per bay.

F.2.2.1.4 Design versus Test Horsepower

Since a test is seldom run with the motor at design horse-power, it is necessary to adjust test conditions to design con-ditions.

If a watt meter or plant power factor data are not available,the following approximation for test horsepower can be used:

To convert sound-power level calculated at test motorhorsepower (PWLtest at hptest) to predicted sound-power levelat design power (PWLdesign at HPdesign) use the following equa-tion:

PWLdesign = PWLtest + 10(loghpdesign – loghptest)

Table F-2—Corrections for Background Noise

Difference Between Total Noise Level and Backgrounda

Decibels to be Subtracted from the Total Measured

Noise Levelb

3 3.0

4 2.2

5 1.7

6 1.3

7 1.0

8 0.7

9 0.6

10 0.5

> 10 0.0

aDifference is defined as the test point reading minus the background noise level.bCorrection is defined as the dB value to be subtracted from the test point reading.

SPL 10 log 1 n⁄( ) antilogSPL1

10------------ antilog

SPL2

10------------ antilog

SPLn

10------------+ +

=

SPL 1 n⁄ SPL1 SPL2 …SPLn+ +( )=

PWL SPL log S so⁄( )+=

PW Lbay 10 log antilogPW Lcylinder

10--------------------------- antilog

PW Lhemisphere

10---------------------------------+

=

h ptest h pnameplate

Voltstest Amperestest×Voltsnameplate Amperesnameplate×-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

×=

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 69: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 61

Test horsepower should be within 15 percent of designhorsepower to use this equation.

F.2.2.2 Application of Reduction Procedures

F.2.2.2.1 Background Noise

Adjust test point readings for background noise level. Pre-pare a tabulation of adjusted values for each position. Theexample in Table F-3 illustrates the procedure.

F.2.2.2.2 Sound-Pressure Level

Consider a test in which an imaginary cylinder has the fol-lowing dimensions: R equals 10 meters and H equals 4.88meters with adjusted test point readings of 81.9, 74.8, 80.8,and 75.4 dB in one octave band and adjusted test point read-ings of 51.8, 53.8, 52.9, and 52.3 dB in another octave band.

In the first case, the maximum difference in values to beaveraged is 7.1 (81.9 – 74.8); therefore, the representativeSPL equals:

In the second case, the maximum difference in values to beaveraged is 2.0 (53.8 – 51.8); therefore, the representativeSPL equals:

F.2.2.2.3 Sound-Power Level

Convert representative SPL for the cylinder in the first case to PWL. From F.2.2.2.2, SPL equals 79.3 dB.

PWL = SPL + 10 log (2 π RH)

= 79.3 + 10 log (2 x π x 10 x 4.88)

= 79.3 + 10 log 306.6

= 79.3 + 24.9

= 104.2 dB

Determine the sound-power level per bay, assuming thatthe hemispherical PWL equals 106 and the cylindrical PWLequals 104.2.

= 10 log (6.6114 x 1010)

= 10 x 10.82

= 108.2 dB

Determine the sound-power level per fan in a two fan bayif the PWL per bay is 108.2.

PWL = 108.2 – 10 log 2

= 108.2 – 3

= 105.2

F.2.2.2.4 Design versus Test Horsepower

If nameplate horsepower is 25, nameplate voltage is 460,nameplate amperage is 31, test voltage is 470, and test amper-age is 27, then:

If design horsepower is 23.7, test horsepower is 22.3, andtest PWL per fan is 105.2 dB, determine adjusted PWL perfan at design horsepower.

PWLdesign = 105.2 + 10 (log 23.7 – log 22.3)

= 105.2 + 10 (1.3747 – 1.3488)

= 105.2 + (10 x 0.0264)

= 105.5 dB

SPL 10 log 1 4⁄ antilog81.910

---------- antilog74.810

---------- antilog80.810

----------+ + antilog75.410

----------+

10 log 1 4 1.5488 108×( ) 0.3020 10

8×( ) 1.2023 108×( ) 0.3467 10

8×( )+ + +⁄[ ]

79.3dB

=

=

=

SPL51.8 53.8 52.9 52.3+ + +

4------------------------------------------------------------

52.7dB=

=

Table F-3—Example of Reduction Procedures for Test on an Isolated Unit

Octave Band Center Frequency

dB(A) 31 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000

Position 1

Test Value 77 82 83 80 79 75 7' 68 62 56

Background 68.5 76 75 71 69 67 62 61 51 44

Difference 8.5 6 8 9 10 8 10 7 11 12

Correction –0.7 –1.3 –0.7 –0.6 –0.5 –0.7 –0.5 –1.0 0.0 0.0

Adjusted Test Point Value

Position 1 76.3 80.7 82.3 79.4 78.5 74.3 71.5 67.0 62.0 56.0

PW Lbay 10 log antilog10610--------- antilog

104.210

-------------+ =

h ptest 25470460---------× 27

31------× 22.3==

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 70: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

62 API STANDARD 661

F.2.3 REPORTING OF DATA

F.2.3.1 General Requirements

The noise test report shall include a summary sheet withthe main results, a description of the equipment tested, andthe noise test data. Appendix F.A provides a model format fornoise test reports. Appendix F.B provides a completed noisetest report for a noise test conducted on an isolated single bay.

F.2.3.2 Summary

The summary shall make reference to this API recom-mended practice.

The principal results of the test are to be reported on onesheet. These results are to be supported by the test data, calcu-lations, and sketches which follow. All calculations and inter-pretation of data shall be in accordance with F.2.2. Thecalculations shall be appended to the noise test report.

The test results shall include the following:

a. The overall sound power levels and the octave band soundpower levels shall be tabulated.b. Measurements taken at special locations for future refer-ence in correlating sound-power level and sound level dataand for estimating noise levels below the unit shall be shownseparately. Corrected and uncorrected noise levels shall bereported.

F.2.3.3 Requirements for Data Sheet

Data sheets shall include the following:

a. A sketch of the test layout and microphone locations shallbe provided. Special measuring locations shall be noted onthe sketch.b. A description of the equipment tested and its operatingconditions shall be provided.c. Details of the measuring equipment including make,model, and serial number shall be recorded.d. A tabulation of all test data [dB(A) and octave band soundpressure levels] shall be provided, which includes:

1. Sound level measurements at each test point.2. Background sound level measurements at selectedpoints.3. Sound level measurements at special locations.

F.3 Procedure for Conducting Noise Tests on Installed Units

F.3.1 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING NOISE TEST DATA

F.3.1.1 Description and Requirements of Test

This section covers procedures for noise testing oninstalled units. However, it should be noted that a more accu-rate test procedure for the determination of noise levels of air-

cooled heat exchangers is given in Section F.2. The SectionF.2 procedure would not usually be satisfactory for applica-tion on installed air-cooled heat exchangers in operatingplants.

The test procedure outlined in Section F.2 is ideally suitedfor shop test situations and employs measurements of soundpressure levels of an imaginary hemisphere and cylinder hav-ing a radius of about 10 meters. This large measuring dis-tance, 10 meters, would be impractical for installedexchanger situations and would yield inaccurate resultsbecause of noise interference from other operating plantequipment and the measurement location interference ofnearby equipment. In order for a noise test procedure for useon installed multibay operating units to yield reasonablyaccurate results the noise reading locations must:

a. Be within easy reach using the sound level meter, micro-phone (with wind screen), microphone cable, and short exten-sion pole.b. Be 1 meter from the fan and tube bundle to minimizeinterference from other plant noise sources. The 1 meter mea-suring distance of sound-pressure level reading has beenwidely used to determine sound-power levels.c. Provide representative average sound-pressure levels forthe imaginary projected surface of the fan and tube bundle, ata 1 meter distance, so that the sound power level of the indi-vidual exchanger and the entire exchanger bank can be deter-mined by calculation.d. Be far enough away from the adjacent exchanger bays sothat the background noise level is a minimum of 3 dB (prefer-ably 6 dB) below the level of the test bay. It will normally benecessary to shut down the immediately adjacent bays toreduce sufficiently the ambient noise level of the test bay inorder to yield more accurate results.

The following noise test procedure for installed operatingequipment to determine sound-power levels should yield anaccuracy of ±2 dB compared to the more accurate shop testprocedure of Section F.2. The degree of accuracy is heavilyinfluenced by the background noise level at the time of thetest. Every effort should be made to reduce background noiselevels to a minimum by making the test before plant start-upor by shutting down adjacent exchangers during the test.

The test accuracy could be detrimentally affected when theair-cooled heat exchanger is located very close to grade ordirectly adjacent to buildings. These situations wouldincrease the sound pressure levels because sound reflectionwill cause erroneous readings.

F.3.1.2 Test Conditions

The equipment should be operating as near as is practicalto design fan tip speed and motor horsepower. Since mosttests must be run at conditions other than design conditions, itis desirable to agree beforehand on the corrections to be made

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 71: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 63

for these variables. For example, the blade angle can be set toduplicate design horsepower. (Refer to F.3.2.2.4 if correctionsneed to be made because test conditions differ from designconditions.)

F.3.1.3 Location of Test Measuring Points

Figures F-2 and F-3 show the recommended measuringlocations for induced- and forced-draft unit applications,respectively.

To avoid excessive noise contribution from the fan drive,the microphone should be placed no closer than 1 meter fromthe motor, machinery mounts, or other members.

F.3.1.4 Checklist

A noise test on operating equipment must usually be runwithin a short period of time, particularly when adjacentoperating bays are shut down to reduce background noise forimproved test accuracy. Therefore, the recording of all perti-nent data must be accomplished as quickly as possible.

The following steps should aid operators in preparing fortests:

1. Prepare all drawings and data forms prior to the test.2. Check that all noise test equipment is in working orderand calibrated. A discharged battery, a faulty connection,or similar problem has invalidated many tests.3. Check that equipment necessary to position the micro-phone at all test points is on hand prior to beginning thetest.4. Check the weather forecast. The test should not be runduring rain or while winds are above 10 miles per hour.5. Do a preliminary check of motor amperes and volts toassure the operation of motors near design speed.6. Check the unit for any unusual noises or problems. Isthere any unusual belt noise, gear noise, motor noise, orbearing noise? Are there any loose parts rattling?7. Check that there are no intermittent noise sources orsteam leaks adjacent to the test location that could causeinaccurate test readings.8. Be aware that toothed sheaves with lobed or toothedbelts create a dominant noise in the 1,000 to 2,000 Hzrange.

F.3.1.5 Recording of Data

Prior to recording the data, a preliminary survey should beconducted with the sound level meter on the dB(A) setting. Ifthe noise levels differ by more than 6 dB(A) across any radi-ating surface, additional measurements shall be taken. A sub-jective impression by ear should be made to decide whetherthe noise is from the source under test or another source. If itis not possible to obtain valid noise data from a particular sur-face because of background noise, the source of the back-ground noise will have to be reduced or eliminated. The only

other option is to conduct the test on another bay of identicaldesign and construction.

Record all data as required on the data sheet (see F.3.3 andAppendixes F.A and F.C). The calibration readings shall berecorded at the start and finish of a noise test. Backgroundreadings shall be taken at points 1, 4, 5, and 8 and at addi-tional locations if conditions warrant. All sound level read-ings should be taken with the meter set to “slow” responseand with a wind screen over the microphone.

F.3.2 CALCULATIONS AND INTERPRETATION

F.3.2.1 Reducing Test Data

F.3.2.1.1 Background Noise

If the test point reading exceeds the background level bymore than 10 dB, no correction of the test point reading isrequired. When the difference between the noise level andthe background is less than 3 dB, the measurements have nosignificance and valid test results cannot be obtained. If thedifference between the test point reading and the back-ground level is greater than 3 dB but less than or equal to 10dB, the measured noise level shall be corrected according toTable F-2.

F.3.2.1.2 Determining Mean Sound-Pressure Levels

Adjust test point readings at each location for backgroundnoise. Determine SPL for both fans and bundles for the over-all dB(A) plus each of the nine frequencies.

The mean sound-pressure level values are determinedusing the following equations.

If the maximum difference between values to be averagedis greater than 6 dB, SPL is derived from the following equa-tion:

If the maximum difference between values to be averagedis 6 dB or less, SPL is derived from the following equation:

F.3.2.1.3 Sound-Power Level

Convert the mean sound-power levels (SPLs) to PWLs.This is done for each of the nine frequencies plus the over-alldB(A) and is done separately for each fan and bundle. To con-vert SPL to PWL use the following equation:

SPL 10 log 1 n⁄( ) antilogSPL1

10------------ antilog

SPL2

10------------ antilog

SPLn

10------------+ +

=

SPL 1 n⁄ SPL1 SPL2 …SPLn+ +( )=

PWL SPL 10 log S so⁄( )+=

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 72: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

64 API STANDARD 661

1 2

655-8

1-4

D

W

D

3 4

D

L/2

87

L/2

L

1/4 DTypical

1/8 LTypical

B

B

20° Typical

LegendDLWB

====

inside diameter of fan shroud, in meters.length of unit bay, in meters.width of bay, in meters.1.0 meter from fan shroud and bundle face.

Note: This example is for installed equipment in an operating plant situation.

1 2

65

1-4

5-8

D

W

3 4

DD

L/2

87

L/2

1/4 DTypical

1/8 LTypical

B

B

20° Typicalfan noisedivergence

LegendDLWB

====

inside diameter of fan shroud, in meters.length of unit bay, in meters.width of bay, in meters.1.0 meter from fan shroud and bundle face.

Note: This example is for installed equipment in an operating plant situation.

Figure F-3—Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger SPL Test Measurement Points for a Forced-Draft Unit

Figure F-2—Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger SPL Test Measurement Points for an Induced-Draft Unit

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 73: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 65

Where:S = the projected surface area as defined in Figures

F-2 and F-3, in square meters.s0 = a reference area of 1 square meter.

Note that the 20 degree divergence angle is an empiricalmeans of causing the near field test results to match closelywith the far field test results.

Areafans = N(π / 4)[D + (2 x tan 20° x B)]2

= N(π / 4)[D + (1.73 x B)]2

Where:N = number of fans per bay.

LW = area bundles.

Sound-power level per bay equals the sum of PWL for fansplus bundles.

To add PWLs:

Sound-power level per fan can be determined as follows:

PWLfan = PWLbay – 10 log N

F.3.2.1.4 Design versus Test Horsepower

Since a test is seldom run with the motor at design horse-power, it is necessary to adjust test conditions to design con-ditions. In most cases the following approximation for testhorsepower can be used:

To convert sound-power level calculated at test motorhorsepower (PWLtest at hptest) to predicted sound-power level atdesign power (PWLdesign at HPtest) use the following equation:

PWLdesign = PWLtest + 10 (log hpdesign – log hptest)

Test horsepower should be within 15 percent of designhorsepower to use this equation.

F.3.2.2 Application of Reduction Procedures

F.3.2.2.1 Background Noise

Adjust test point readings for background noise level. Pre-pare a tabulation of adjusted SPL values for each test posi-tion. The example in Table F-4 illustrates the procedure.

F.3.2.2.2 Sound-Pressure Level

Consider a test in which the fans have adjusted test pointreadings of 86.6, 87.7, 86.6, and 85.5 dB in one octave bandand 88.6, 82.7, 90.8, and 88.6 dB in another octave band.

In the first case, the maximum difference in values to beaveraged is 2.2 (87.7 – 85.5); therefore:

In the second case, the maximum difference in values to beaveraged is 8.1 (90.8 – 82.7); therefore:

F.3.2.2.3 Sound-Power Level

Convert (SPL) for the fans in the first case to PWL. FromF.3.2.2.2, (SPL) equals 86.6 dB. Assume two fans 3.66 metersin diameter.

If (SPL) for the bundle in the first case is 84.7, L equals9.15 meters, and W equals 4.88 meters, bundle PWL is:

PWL = 84.7 + 10 log (9.15 x 4.88) = 101.2 dB

PW Lbay 10 log antilogPW L fans

10--------------------- antilog

PW Lbundles

10--------------------------+

=

h ptest h pnameplate

Voltstest Amperestest×Voltsnameplate Amperesnameplate×-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

×=

Table F-4—Example of Reduction Procedures for Test on an Installed Unit

Octave Band Center Frequency

dB(A) 31 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000

Position 1

Test Value 87 91 93 90 89 84 82 78 72 66

Background 79 84 85 82 81 77 74 70 64 58

Difference 8 7 8 8 8 7 8 8 8 8

Correction –0.7 –1.0 –0.7 –0.7 –0.7 –1.0 –0.7 –0.7 –0.7 –0.7

Adjusted Test Point Value

Position 1 86.3 90 92.3 89.3 88.3 83 81.3 77.3 71.3 65.3

SPL86.6 87.7 86.6 85.5+ + +

4------------------------------------------------------------ 86.6 dB= =

SPL 10 log 1 4⁄ antilog88.610

------------ antilog82.710

------------ antilog90.810

------------+ + antilog88.610

------------+

10 log 7.0934 108×( )

88.5 dB

=

=

=

PWL 86.6 10 2π4

------ 3.66 173+( )2log+ 101.4 dB= =

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 74: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

66 API STANDARD 661

Determine the sound-power level per bay. In the first case:

The sound-power level per fan is determined as follows:

PWLfan = 104.3 – 10 log 2

= 101.3 dB

F.3.2.2.4 Design versus Test Horsepower

If nameplate horsepower is 25, nameplate voltage is 460,nameplate amperage is 31, test voltage is 470, and test amper-age is 27, then:

If design horsepower is 23.7, test horsepower is 22.3, andtest PWL per fan is 102.4, determine adjusted PWL per fan atdesign horsepower:

PWLdesign = 102.4 + 10 (log 23.7 – log 22.3)

= 102.4 + 0.3

= 102.7 dB

F.3.3 REPORTING OF DATA

F.3.3.1 General Requirements

The noise test report shall include a summary sheet withthe main results, a description of the equipment tested, andthe noise test data. Appendix F.A provides a model format fornoise test reports. Appendix F.C provides a completed noisetest report for a noise test conducted on an installed unit.

F.3.3.2 Summary

The summary shall make reference to this API recom-mended practice.

The principal results of the test are to be reported on onesheet. These results are to be supported by the test data, calcu-lations, and sketches which follow. All calculations and inter-pretation of data shall be in accordance with F.3.2. Thecalculations shall be appended to the noise test report. Thetest results shall include the following:

a. The overall sound power levels and the octave band soundpower levels shall be tabulated.

b. Measurements taken at special locations, such as for hear-ing conservation purposes or for future reference, shall beshown separately. Corrected and uncorrected noise levelsshall be reported.

F.3.3.3 Requirements for Data Sheet

Data sheets shall include the following:

a. A sketch of the test layout and microphone locations shallbe provided. Special measuring locations shall be noted onthe sketch.

b. A description of the equipment tested and its operatingconditions shall be provided.

c. Details of the measuring equipment, including make,model, and serial number, shall be provided.

d. A tabulation of all test data dB(A) and octave band soundpressure levels shall be provided, which includes:

1. Sound level measurements at each test point.

2. Background sound level measurements at selectedpoints.

3. Sound level measurements at special locations.

PW Lbay 10 log antilog101.4

10------------- antilog

101.210

-------------+ 104.3 dB==

h ptest 25470460---------× 27

31------× 22.3= =

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 75: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

67

APPENDIX F.A—MODEL FORMAT FOR NOISE TEST REPORT

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 76: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 77: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 69

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

I. SUMMARYFor the measurement and calculation procedures used in this report, reference is made to API Standard 661, Air-Cooled HeatExchangers.

Author(s): __________________________________________________________________________________________

Department: _________________________________________________________________________________________

Date of measurements: ________________________________________________________________________________

Model: _____________________________________________________________________________________________

Plant location: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Specify: isolated ____________________________________ installed ________________________________________

Manufacturer: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Item number: ________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Service: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Sound Power Level Per Fan [dB(A)]

Identification

Octave Band Center Frequencies (Hz)

dB(A) 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

Sound Level and Octave Band Readings at Special Locations [dB(A)]

Identification

Octave Band Frequencies

dB(A) 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 78: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

70 API STANDARD 661

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

Description of MeasuringLocation Reason for Measurement

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

II. DESCRIPTION OF BAY OR UNIT AND OPERATING CONDITIONS1. Sketch of unit or bay (indicate test layout and location of microphones). See Figures F-1, F-2, and F-3 for example sketches.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 79: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 71

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 80: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

72 API STANDARD 661

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

2. Information from Equipment Data Sheet.

Fan(s).

forced draft: _________________________________ induced draft: ________________________________________

rpm: _____________________________________________________________________________________________

capacity (ACFM): __________________________________________________________________________________

diameter: _________________________________________________________________________________________

static pressure: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Number of bays: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Number of fans per bay: _______________________________________________________________________________

Driver.

Type: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Rated horsepower: __________________________________________________________________________________

rpm: _____________________________________________________________________________________________

Auxiliaries (such as gears): _____________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

III. TEST CONDITIONS

Fan rpm: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Fan pitch: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Motor nameplate: amps _____________________________ volts _________________________________

Motor measured: amps _____________________________ volts _________________________________

Static pressure (In. W.C.): ______________________________________________________________________________

Weather conditions:

Wind velocity (mph): ________________________________________________________________________________

Wind direction: ____________________________________________________________________________________

Ambient temperature (degrees Fahrenheit): ______________________________________________________________

Remarks: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 81: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 73

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

IV. MEASURING EQUIPMENT

Microphone.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Sound level meter.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Octave band analyzer.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Acoustical calibrator.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Other. ______________________________________________________________________________________________

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

V. NOISE DATA SHEET

All noise data shall be recorded on the noise data sheet on page ____ of this report. The tabulation shall include soundlevel measurements at each test point, background sound levels at selected points, and sound level measurements at speciallocations.

CALCULATIONS

The calculations made to prepare this report are appended to this report and appear on pages ____ through ____.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 82: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

74 API STANDARD 661

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

NOISE AND BACKGROUND DATA SHEET

PointNo. Description A 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

dB

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 83: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

75

APPENDIX F.B—EXAMPLE NOISE TEST REPORT FOR ANISOLATED SINGLE BAY TEST

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 84: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 85: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 77

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

I. SUMMARYFor the measurement and calculation procedures used in this report, reference is made to API Standard 661, Air-Cooled HeatExchangers.

Author(s): __________________________________________________________________________________________

Department: _________________________________________________________________________________________

Date of measurements: ________________________________________________________________________________

Model: _____________________________________________________________________________________________

Plant location: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Specify: isolated ____________________________________ installed ________________________________________

Manufacturer: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Item number: ________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Service: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Sound Power Level Per Fan [dB(A)]

Identification

Octave Band Center Frequencies (Hz)

dB(A) 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

100.2 105.3 106.4 103.4 102.6 98.3 95.6 91.2 85.6 79.6

Sound Level and Octave Band Readings at Special Locations [dB(A)]

Identification

Octave Band Frequencies

dB(A) 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

Position 14 86.5 90.4 92.5 89.5 88.5 83.4 81.5 77.5 71.5 65.5

Position 15 88.0 91.5 91.4 91.0 90.0 83.4 83.0 79.0 73.0 67.0

Sample Report

1/5/81

1 7

Name

Department name

1/4/81

16 x 32 forced draft

Chicago

ABC Corporation

E-138

25713

Condenser

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 86: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

78 API STANDARD 661

8

1

5 2,4 3

11

6,78,9

13 10 12

12

7

11

10

13

9

2

6

3

4

5

Geometriccenter

R

0.975 R

0.745 RX

YZ

x

x

xx x

xx x

x x

x

x x x

x

x

x

xx

x

x

H +

0.2

22 R

0.5

H H

Geometric centerplane

Grade

H +

0.6

67 R

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

Description of MeasuringLocation Reason for Measurement

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

II. DESCRIPTION OF BAY OR UNIT AND OPERATING CONDITIONS1. Sketch of unit or bay (indicate test layout and location of microphones). See Figures F-1, F-2, and F-3 for example sketches.

Sample Report

1/5/81

2 7

1 meter below fans personnel exposure and comparison

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 87: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 79

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

2. Information from Equipment Data Sheet.

Fan(s).

forced draft: _________________________________ induced draft: ________________________________________

rpm: _____________________________________________________________________________________________

capacity (ACFM): __________________________________________________________________________________

diameter: _________________________________________________________________________________________

static pressure: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Number of bays: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Number of fans per bay: _______________________________________________________________________________

Driver.

Type: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Rated horsepower: __________________________________________________________________________________

rpm: _____________________________________________________________________________________________

Auxiliaries (such as gears): _____________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

III. TEST CONDITIONS

Fan rpm: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Fan pitch: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Motor nameplate: amps _____________________________ volts _________________________________

Motor measured: amps _____________________________ volts _________________________________

Static pressure (In. W.C.): ______________________________________________________________________________

Weather conditions:

Wind velocity (mph): ________________________________________________________________________________

Wind direction: ____________________________________________________________________________________

Ambient temperature (degrees Fahrenheit): ______________________________________________________________

Remarks: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sample Report

1/5/81

3 7

239

170,000

12 feet

0.45 in W.C.

1

2

Electric Motor

25 hp

1750 rpm

None

241 rpm

10°

1 31 2 31 1 460 2 460

1 26 2 26 1 480 2 480

1 0.45 2 0.46

8 mph

From northeast

60° to 70°

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 88: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

80 API STANDARD 661

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

IV. MEASURING EQUIPMENT

Microphone.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Sound level meter.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Octave band analyzer.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Acoustical calibrator.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Other. ______________________________________________________________________________________________

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

V. NOISE DATA SHEET

All noise data shall be recorded on the noise data sheet on page ____ of this report. The tabulation shall include soundlevel measurements at each test point, background sound levels at selected points, and sound level measurements at speciallocations.

CALCULATIONS

The calculations made to prepare this report are appended to this report and appear on pages ____ through ____.

Sample Report

1/5/81

4 7

GR 1/2 inch

4876

GR

1933

3433

GR

1933

3433

GR

1562 A

19512

6

5 7

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 89: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 81

114 114.2 114.4 114.0114.1Measured

Background

Corrected

calculated

77

63.5

77

82

71

82.0

83

70

83.0

80

66

80.0

75

62

75.0

72

57

72.0

68

56

68.0

62

46

62.0

79

64

79.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

1

71

63.5

70.0

77

71

75.7

78

70

77.3

75

66

74.4

70

62

69.3

67

57

66.5

63

56

62.0

57

46

57

74

64

73.5

Measured

Background

Corrected

2

73

63.5

72.4

79

71

78.3

80

70

79.5

77

66

77.0

72

62

71.5

69

57

69.0

65

56

65.0

59

46

59.0

76

64

76.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

3

72

63.5

71.3

78

71

77.0

79

70

78.4

76

66

75.5

71

62

70.4

68

57

68.0

64

56

63.3

58

46

58.0

75

64

75.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

4

71

63.5

70.0

77

71

75.7

78

70

77.3

75

66

74.4

70

62

69.3

67

57

66.5

63

56

62.0

57

46

57.0

74

64

73.5

Measured

Background

Corrected

5

74

61.5

74.0

80

69

80.0

81

68

81.0

78

64

78.0

73

60

73.0

70

55

70.0

66

54

66.0

60

44

60.6

77

62

77.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

6

73

61.5

73.0

79

69

78.5

80

68

80.0

77

64

77.0

72

60

72.0

69

55

69.0

65

54

65.0

59

44

59.0

76

62

76.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

7

74

61.5

74.0

80

69

80.0

81

68

81.0

78

64

78.0

73

60

73.0

70

55

70.0

66

54

66.0

60

44

60.0

77

62

77.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

8

72

61.5

72.0

78

69

77.4

79

68

79.0

76

64

76.0

71

60

71.0

68

55

68.0

64

54

63.4

58

44

58.0

75

62

75.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

9

NOISE AND BACKGROUND DATA SHEET

PointNo. Description A 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

dB

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

Sample Report

1/5/81

5 7

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 90: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

82 API STANDARD 661

73.5

61.5

73.5

80

69

79.4

79

68

78.4

76

64

76.0

71

60

70.4

68

55

68.0

64

54

63.4

58

44

58.0

76

62

76.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

10

74

62.5

74.0

78

70

77.3

79.5

69

79.5

78

65

78.0

73

61

73.0

70

56

70.0

66

55

66.0

60

45

60.0

75.5

63

62.5 70 69 65 61 56 55 4563

62.5 70 69 65 61 56 55 4563

75.5

Measured

Background

Corrected

11

73

73.0

79

78.4

81

81.0

77

77.0

72

71.0

69

69.0

65

64.4

79

59.0

75

75.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

12

75

75.0

78.5

77.8

80

80.0

76.5

76.5

71.5

71.5

68.5

68.5

64.5

63.9

58.5

58.5

77

77.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

13

73.2 78.8 79.6 76.6 71.6 68.8 64.5 58.975.8Measured

Background

Corrected

SPL

9 pt. Hem

101.2 106.7 107.6 104.6 99.6 96.8 92.5 86.9103.8Measured

Background

Corrected

PWL Hem

73.9 78.2 79.7 76.9 71.5 68.9 64.4 58.975.9Measured

Background

Corrected

SPL

4 pt. Cyl

98.8 103.1 104.6 101.8 96.4 93.8 89.3 83.8100.8Measured

Background

Corrected

PWL Cyl

103.2 108.3 109.4 106.4 101.3 98.6 94.2 88.6105.6Measured

Background

Corrected

Total PWL

100.2 105.3 106.4 103.4 98.3 95.6 91.2 85.6102.6Measured

Background

Corrected

PWL/Fan

NOISE AND BACKGROUND DATA SHEET

PointNo. Description A 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

dB

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

Sample Report

1/5/81

6 7

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 91: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 83

87

62.5

86.5

91

70

90.4

93

69

92.5

90

65

89.5

84

61

83.4

82

56

81.5

78

55

77.5

72

45

71.5

89

63

88.5

Measured

Background

Corrected

14

88

77

88.0

92

82

91.5

92

83

91.4

91

80

91.0

84

75

83.4

83

72

83.0

79

68

79.0

73

62

73.0

90

79

90.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

15

113.8 114.0 114.1 113.8113.9Measured

Background

Corrected

calculated

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

NOISE AND BACKGROUND DATA SHEET

PointNo. Description A 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

dB

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

Sample Report

1/5/81

7 7

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 92: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 93: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

85

APPENDIX F.C—EXAMPLE NOISE TEST REPORT FOR ANINSTALLED UNIT

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 94: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 95: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 87

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

I. SUMMARYFor the measurement and calculation procedures used in this report, reference is made to API Standard 661, Air-Cooled HeatExchangers.

Author(s): __________________________________________________________________________________________

Department: _________________________________________________________________________________________

Date of measurements: ________________________________________________________________________________

Model: _____________________________________________________________________________________________

Plant location: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Specify: isolated ____________________________________ installed ________________________________________

Manufacturer: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Item number: ________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Service: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Sound Power Level Per Fan [dB(A)]

Identification

Octave Band Center Frequencies (Hz)

dB(A) 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

100.6 105.6 106.6 103.6 102.6 98.6 95.6 91.6 85.6 79.6

Sound Level and Octave Band Readings at Special Locations [dB(A)]

Identification

Octave Band Frequencies

dB(A) 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

Position 2 88.0 92.0 94.0 91.0 87.5 85.0 80.5 76.5 73.0 66.0

Sample Report

1/5/81

1 6

Name

Department name

1/4/81

16 x 32 forced draft

Dallas

ABC Corporation

E-138

25713

Condenser

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 96: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

88 API STANDARD 661

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

Description of MeasuringLocation Reason for Measurement

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

II. DESCRIPTION OF BAY OR UNIT AND OPERATING CONDITIONS1. Sketch of unit or bay (indicate test layout and location of microphones). See Figures F-1, F-2, and F-3 for example sketches.

Sample Report

1/5/81

2 6

1 meter below fan at Position 2 personnel exposure and comparison

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 97: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 89

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

2. Information from Equipment Data Sheet.

Fan(s).

forced draft: _________________________________ induced draft: ________________________________________

rpm: _____________________________________________________________________________________________

capacity (ACFM): __________________________________________________________________________________

diameter: _________________________________________________________________________________________

static pressure: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Number of bays: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Number of fans per bay: _______________________________________________________________________________

Driver.

Type: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Rated horsepower: __________________________________________________________________________________

rpm: _____________________________________________________________________________________________

Auxiliaries (such as gears): _____________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

III. TEST CONDITIONS

Fan rpm: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Fan pitch: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Motor nameplate: amps _____________________________ volts _________________________________

Motor measured: amps _____________________________ volts _________________________________

Static pressure (In. W.C.): ______________________________________________________________________________

Weather conditions:

Wind velocity (mph): ________________________________________________________________________________

Wind direction: ____________________________________________________________________________________

Ambient temperature (degrees Fahrenheit): ______________________________________________________________

Remarks: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sample Report

1/5/81

3 6

239 rpm

170,000

12 feet

0.45 in W.C.

1

2

Electric Motor

25 hp

1750 rpm

None

241 rpm

10°

1 31 2 31 1 460 2 460

1 27 2 28 1 470 2 470

1 0.47 2 0.48

6 mph

From south-southeast

65° to 70°

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 98: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

90 API STANDARD 661

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

IV. MEASURING EQUIPMENT

Microphone.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Sound level meter.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Octave band analyzer.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Acoustical calibrator.

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

Other. ______________________________________________________________________________________________

Make: ____________________________________________________________________________________________

Model: ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Serial number: _____________________________________________________________________________________

V. NOISE DATA SHEET

All noise data shall be recorded on the noise data sheet on page ____ of this report. The tabulation shall include soundlevel measurements at each test point, background sound levels at selected points, and sound level measurements at speciallocations.

CALCULATIONS

The calculations made to prepare this report are appended to this report and appear on pages ____ through ____.

Sample Report

1/5/81

4 6

GR 1/2 inch

4876

GR

1933

3433

GR

1933

3433

GR

1562 A

19512

6

5 6

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 99: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 91

113.9 114 113.9 114.1113.8Measured

Background

Corrected

calculated

87

76

87.0

91

81

90.5

93

82

93.0

90

79

90.0

84

74

83.5

82

71

82.0

78

67

78.0

72

61

72.0

89

78

89.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

1

88

76

88.0

92

81

92.0

94

82

94.0

91

79

91.0

85

74

85.0

81

71

80.5

77

67

76.5

73

61

73.0

88

78

87.5

Measured

Background

Corrected

2

87

76

87.0

93

81

93.0

93

82

93.0

90

79

90.0

86

74

86.0

83

71

83.0

79

67

79.0

72

61

72.0

90

78

90.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

3

86

76

85.5

92

81

92.0

92

82

91.5

89

79

88.5

85

74

85.0

82

71

82.0

78

67

78.0

71

61

70.5

89

78

89.0

Measured

Background

Corrected

4

82

74

81.3

87

79

86.3

88

80

87.3

85

77

84.3

80

72

79.3

77

69

76.3

73

65

72.3

67

59

66.3

84

76

83.3

Measured

Background

Corrected

5

83

74

82.4

88

79

87.4

89

80

88.4

86

77

85.4

81

72

80.4

78

69

77.4

74

65

73.4

68

59

67.4

85

76

84.4

Measured

Background

Corrected

6

84

74

83.5

89

79

88.5

90

80

89.5

87

77

86.5

82

72

81.5

79

69

78.5

75

65

74.5

69

59

68.5

86

76

85.5

Measured

Background

Corrected

7

83

74

82.4

88

79

87.4

89

80

88.4

86

77

85.4

81

72

80.4

78

69

77.4

74

65

73.4

68

59

67.4

85

76

84.4

Measured

Background

Corrected

8

113.8 113.8 113.7 113.9113.7Measured

Background

Corrected

calculated

NOISE AND BACKGROUND DATA SHEET

PointNo. Description A 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

dB

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

Sample Report

1/5/81

5 6

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 100: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

92 API STANDARD 661

86.9 91.9 92.9 89.9 84.9 81.9 77.9 71.988.9

Measured

Background

Corrected

SPL

101.7 106.7 107.7 104.7 99.7 96.7 92.7 86.7103.7

Measured

Background

Corrected

PWL

below

82.4 87.4 88.4 85.9 80.4 77.4 73.4 67.484.4

Measured

Background

Corrected

SPL

99.2 104.2 105.2 102.2 97.2 94.2 90.2 84.2101.2

Measured

Background

Corrected

PWL

above

103.6 108.6 109.6 106.6 101.6 98.6 94.6 88.6105.6

Measured

Background

Corrected

Total

PWL

100.6 105.6 106.6 103.6 98.6 95.6 91.6 85.6102.6

Measured

Background

Corrected

PWL/Fan

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

Measured

Background

Corrected

NOISE AND BACKGROUND DATA SHEET

PointNo. Description A 31 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

dB

Job No. _______________________________

NOISE TEST REPORT Date of Report __________________________

Page _________ of _________

Sample Report

1/5/81

6 6

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 101: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

93

APPENDIX G—WINTERIZATION OF AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 102: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 103: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

95

CONTENTS

Page

G.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97G.1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97G.1.2 Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97G.1.3 Referenced Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

G.2 WINTERIZATION PROBLEM AREAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97G.2.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97G.2.2 Reasons for Winterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97G.2.3 General Design Data Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97G.2.4 Heat Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98G.2.5 General Problem Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98G.2.6 Process Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98G.2.7 Safety Margins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

G.3 METHODS OF WINTERIZATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100G.3.1 Airflow and Air Temperature Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100G.3.2 Concurrent Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103G.3.3 Bare Tubes or Reduced Fin Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103G.3.4 Varying the Active Heat Transfer Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103G.3.5 Serpentine Coils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104G.3.6 Indirect Cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104G.3.7 Duty Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105G.3.8 Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105G.3.9 Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

G.4 CRITICAL PROCESS TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106G.4.1 Pour Points of Hydrocarbon Liquid Mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106G.4.2 Freezing Points of Hydrocarbons and Other Organic Liquid Pure

Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106G.4.3 Water Solutions of Organic Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106G.4.4 Ammonium Bisulfide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106G.4.5 High-Pressure Gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106G.4.6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

G.5 TUBE WALL TEMPERATURE CALCULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112G.5.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112G.5.2 Nomenclature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112G.5.3 Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112G.5.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

G.6 HEAT LOSSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114G.6.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114G.6.2 Louver Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114G.6.3 Surface Heat Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

G.7 GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114G.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114G.7.2 Design Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

G.8 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115G.8.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115G.8.2 Design Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

95

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 104: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

96

CONTENTS

Page

G.8.3 Design Temperature Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115G.8.4 Typical Characteristics and Operating Ranges for Standard Mechanical

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115G.8.5 Auxiliary Heating Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

G.9 START-UP AND SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116G.9.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116G.9.2 Start-Up Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116G.9.3 Shutdown Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

APPENDIX G.A SAMPLE ECONOMIC COMPARISON OF INDIRECT(TEMPERED-WATER) VERSUS DIRECT AIR COOLING FOR SYSTEMS REQUIRING WINTERIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . 119

APPENDIX G.B CALCULATION OF MINIMUM TUBE WALL TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

APPENDIX G.C SAMPLE CALCULATION OF HEAT LOSSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

FiguresG-1 System A: Airflow Control with Automatically Controlled Variable-

Pitch Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101G-2 System A: Airflow Control with Automatically Controlled Outlet

Louvers and Fixed-Pitch Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101G-3 System B: Induced Draft with Noncontained Internal Air Recirculation . . . 102G-4 System B: Forced Draft with Noncontained Internal Air Recirculation . . . . 102G-5 System C: Typical Forced-Draft Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger with

Contained Internal Air Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103G-6 System D: Typical Forced-Draft Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger with

External Air Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104G-7 Freezing Points of Phenol-Water Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107G-8 Freezing Points of Ethanolamine-Water Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107G-9 Freezing Points of Glycerol-Water Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108G-10 Dissociation Constant of Ammonium Bisulfide (NH4HS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109G-11 Hydrate Pressure-Temperature Equilibria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110G.A-1 Tempered-Water System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

TablesG-1 Safety Margins for Different Process Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99G-2 Freezing Points of Frequently Encountered Liquid Pure Components . . . . . 106G.A-1A Description of Indirect and Direct Air Cooling Systems (Customary Units) 120G.A-1B Description of Indirect and Direct Air Cooling Systems (SI Units) . . . . . . . 121G.A-2 Comparison of Costs of Indirect and Direct Air Cooling Systems . . . . . . . . 122G.B-1A Values for rm Referred to the Total Outside Area for a Tube with an Outside

Diameter of 1 Inch and Aluminum Fins 5/8 Inch High and 0.016 Inch Thick,in (Degrees Fahrenheit) (Square Foot) (Hour) per British Thermal Unit . . . 124

G.B-1B Values for rm Referred to the Total Outside Area for a Tube with an OutsideDiameter of 25.4 Millimeters and Aluminum Fins 15.9 Millimeters High and 0.4 Millimeters Thick, in (Kelvins) (Square Meter) per Watt. . . . . . . . . 124

96

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 105: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

97

Winterization of Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers

G.1 General

G.1.1 SCOPE

This appendix presents design features and other consider-ations that contribute to satisfactory functioning of air-cooledheat exchangers operating with low-temperature inlet air.Data related to structural materials for low-temperature ser-vice and safety precautions related to the accumulation ofsnow and ice are not included.

G.1.2 DEFINITION OF TERMS

Terms used in this appendix are defined in G.1.2.1 throughG.1.2.10.

G.1.2.1 winterization: The provision of design features,procedures, or systems for air-cooled heat exchangers toavoid problems with the process fluid as a result of low-tem-perature inlet air. Problems related to low-temperature inletair include fluid freezing, cooling to the pour point, wax for-mation, hydrate formation, laminar flow, and condensation atthe dew point (which may initiate corrosion).

G.1.2.2 inlet air: Atmospheric or ambient air that entersthe air-cooled heat exchanger.

G.1.2.3 exhaust air: Air that is discharged from the air-cooled heat exchanger to the atmosphere.

G.1.2.4 recirculated air: Air that has passed through theprocess bundle and is redirected to mix with and heat the inletair.

G.1.2.5 external recirculation: A process that uses anexternal duct to carry recirculated air to mix with and heat theinlet air.

G.1.2.6 internal recirculation: A process that uses fans(possibly with louvers) to recirculate air from one part of theprocess bundle to the other part.

G.1.2.7 minimum design air temperature: The speci-fied inlet air temperature to be used for winterization.

G.1.2.8 critical process temperatures: Temperaturesrelated to important physical properties of a process stream,such as freezing point, pour point, cloud point, hydrate for-mation temperature, and dew point.

G.1.2.9 specified minimum tube wall temperature:A critical process temperature plus a safety margin.

G.1.2.10 wind skirt: A vertical barrier either above orbelow an air-cooled heat exchanger that minimizes the effectof wind.

G.1.3 REFERENCED PUBLICATIONS

The editions of the following standards that are in effect atthe time of publication of this appendix form a part of thisrecommended practice to the extent specified herein. Theapplicability of changes in standards that occur after theinquiry should be mutually agreed upon by the purchaser andthe vendor.

ASTM1 D97 Test Methods for Pour Point of Petroleum Oils

G.2 Winterization Problem Areas

G.2.1 GENERAL

The purposes of this section are as follows:

a. To identify reasons for winterization of air-cooled heatexchangers.b. To outline general design data requirements for winteriza-tion and guidelines for supplying such data.c. To review heat losses and general problem areas.d. To establish process categories that may require winteriza-tion and safety margins for each category.

G.2.2 REASONS FOR WINTERIZATION

Winterization is generally applied to maintain the tube walltemperature at or above a specified minimum tube wall tem-perature to prevent operating problems. The specified mini-mum tube wall temperature is the point at which the tube walltemperature approaches the fluid’s critical process tempera-ture. Critical process temperatures include the freezing point,the pour point, the wax point, the dew point (if condensationcauses corrosion), the hydrate formation point, and any othertemperature at which operating difficulties may occur.

G.2.3 GENERAL DESIGN DATA REQUIREMENTS

The following data should be determined and specified tothe designer:

a. The specified minimum tube wall temperature, whichshould include a safety margin as discussed inb. The minimum design air temperature.c. All alternative process conditions, including reduced flow(turndown) operations.d. The design wind velocity and the prevailing wind direction.e. The availability of steam or another source of heat forstart-up in cold weather. (If steam is available, the steam pres-sure should be specified.)

1American Society for Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, WestConshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 106: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

98 API STANDARD 661

G.2.4 HEAT LOSSES

The effect of heat losses (by conduction and convection,louver leakage, and natural draft) on the tube wall tempera-ture during start-up, shutdown, and standby operating condi-tions should be considered when the requirements for aheating coil are determined.

G.2.5 GENERAL PROBLEM AREAS

The exit fluid temperature for any single row of any givenpass may not be the same as the average exit fluid tempera-ture for that pass. To avoid potential problems in the field, theexit fluid temperature for each row should be calculated sepa-rately to determine the lowest tube wall temperature.

For critical services it may be desirable to monitor the tubewall temperature in the coldest zone. This may be done byinstalling thermocouples at critical points.

Maldistribution of the process fluid or airstream may alsocause problems that should be considered in the design of theequipment.

G.2.6 PROCESS CATEGORIES

G.2.6.1 General

Most winterization problems fall into one of the followingsix categories:

a. Problems with water and dilute aqueous solutions.b. Problems with total steam condensers.c. Problems with partial steam condensers.d. Problems with condensing process fluids containing steamwith or without noncondensables.e. Problems with viscous fluids and fluids with high pourpoints.f. Problems resulting from freezing, hydrate formation, andcorrosion caused by condensate.

These categories and the ways in which they apply to typi-cal operating cases are described in G.2.6.2 through G.2.6.7.

G.2.6.2 Category 1: Water and Dilute Aqueous Solutions

Water and dilute aqueous solutions have high tube-sideheat transfer coefficients, resulting in relatively high tubemetal temperatures. When these fluids are present, simplewinterization systems, such as airflow control systems, areindicated. Start-up and shutdown at extremely low tempera-tures may require additional measures.

G.2.6.3 Category 2: Total Steam Condensers

Total steam condensers that are single pass may be subjectto a backflow of steam from the outlet end of the upper (hot-

ter) tube rows into the outlet end of the lower (colder) tuberows. This usually leads to noncondensable contaminants col-lecting near the outlet end of the colder tubes. The presenceof noncondensables results in diminished performance and insubcooling and possible freezing of condensate in the coldertubes. Corrosion may also occur.

In quite a few installations, a particular set of conditionshas caused rapid perforation of tube walls. The perforationsoccur near the exit end of the lower (colder) tube rows. Whenthis happens, a repetitive knocking or clicking noise calledwater hammer is always present. These failures, which haveoccurred in numerous locations, have the following commoncharacteristics:

a. One pass with four or more rows of tubes whose outsidediameter is 1 inch (25.4 millimeters) and whose length is 36to 52 feet (11 to 16 meters).

b. Inlet steam pressure between 0 and 25 pounds per squareinch gauge (0 and 172 kilopascals).

The perforations have occurred as quickly as within 1 dayof service on tubes with a wall thickness of 0.035 inch (0.89millimeter) and as slowly as 3 months on tubes with a wallthickness of 0.083 inch (2.11 millimeters). The rapidity offailure appears to be related to the severity of the waterhammer.

Measures to prevent this type of failure are all aimed atreducing or eliminating the quantity of steam back-flowinginto the colder tubes. For instance, in a four-row, one-passcondenser, limiting the tube length to 360 times the tube out-side diameter seems to suffice [for example, a length of 30feet (9 meters) for tubes with an outside diameter of 1 inch(25.4 millimeters)]. Alternatively, the rear header can be sepa-rated into four non-communicating compartments with drainsprovided for each compartment. Another method is to userestriction orifices in the tube inlets; however, this measuremay not be completely effective at all flow rates.

G.2.6.4 Category 3: Partial Steam Condensers

In Category 3 process streams, the quantity of outlet vaporis large enough that backflow cannot occur and steam exitscontinuously from the outlet ends of all tube rows. Thequantity of outlet vapor is typically 10 to 30 weight percentof the total inlet flow. Outlet quantities below 10 weight per-cent are characteristic of Category 2 condensers. The exactquantity of outlet vapor must be established by calculation,with consideration given to the mode of operation at theminimum ambient temperature. If calculations show thatbackflow will not occur, simple winterization systems, suchas airflow control, are indicated. If calculations indicate thatbackflow will occur, moderate to extensive protection sys-tems may be indicated.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 107: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 99

G.2.6.5 Category 4: Condensing Process Fluids Containing Steam with or without Noncondensables

Category 4 is an extension of Category 3. Category 4 high-lights the effects of other condensables on the tube wall tem-perature. Prediction of the tube-side flow regime is essentialfor an accurate evaluation of tube wall and fluid temperatures.Consider, for example, a stream containing steam, condens-able hydrocarbons, and noncondensables. Annular flow mayexist at the condenser inlet, with a liquid hydrocarbon annu-lus being formed on the cold tube wall and surrounding a gascore. Stratified flow may exist at the condenser outlet, withwater and liquid hydrocarbons draining from the bottom ofthe tube while steam condenses on the upper portion. Simplewinterization systems are usually indicated when these condi-tions are present.

G.2.6.6 Category 5: Viscous Fluids and Fluids with High Pour Points

When a viscous fluid is flowing through a number of paral-lel flow paths, local variations in cooling may cause a drasticreduction in velocity in some of the flow paths. This phenom-enon is called unstable flow. Unstable flow is caused whenunder certain conditions of bulk viscosity, wall viscosity, andpressure drop, the increase in pressure drop resulting from ahigher viscosity (caused by the additional cooling allowed bya lower velocity) offsets the decrease in pressure drop result-ing from the lower velocity. This can occur only when thefluid is in laminar flow.

When unstable flow occurs, the velocities in parallel tubeswithin a pass can differ by as much as 5:1. As a result, theexchanger’s overall tube-side pressure drop may increase byup to 100 percent and the heat removal may decrease to lessthan 50 percent of that possible were the fluid equally distrib-uted among the tube paths. This flow maldistribution is amajor factor in many cases of diminished performance of vis-cous and high-pour-point fluid coolers.

At present, only general guidelines exist for avoiding suchmaldistribution. These guidelines are as follows:

a. The bulk viscosity of the process fluid at the outlet temper-ature should not exceed 50 centipoises (50 millipascal-sec-onds).b. The ratio of wall viscosity to bulk viscosity should notexceed 3:1.

The following additional factors should be given extraemphasis in both design and fabrication for this type of ser-vice:

a. Air-side flow distribution and temperature distributionshould be as uniform as possible. External recirculation overonly one side may cause nonuniform airflow and air tempera-ture to the bundle.

b. Air bypassing the bundle between the side frames andtubes should be minimized by conforming to a maximum gapof 3/8 inch (9 millimeters) as specified in API Standard 661.c. Allowable process fluid pressure drop should be high.Pressure drops of 40 pounds per square inch (275 kilopascals)or higher are common.d. Tube-side flow should be uniformly distributed within theheaders. This may require additional nozzles and/or externalinsulation of the headers.

There may be cases in which successful operation can beachieved while violating these guidelines. However, whensuccessful experience is lacking, it is risky to ignore theserecommendations. Alternative designs that should be consid-ered include indirect systems and air-cooled heat exchangerswith serpentine coils.

G.2.6.7 Category 6: Freezing Point, Hydrate Formation Point, and Dew Point

Category 6 process streams are characterized by a discretecritical process temperature. For such streams, the calculationof wall and fluid temperatures tends to be straightforward.Depending on design conditions, recommended winterizationsystems include the full range outlined in Section G.3.

G.2.7 SAFETY MARGINS

So many variables are involved in the process streamsdescribed in G.2.6.2 through G.2.6.7 that establishing a fixedsafety margin (the tube wall temperature minus the criticalprocess temperature) is difficult. Each problem should beanalyzed on an individual basis.

In the absence of more specific information, the safetymargins given in Table G-1 should be added to the criticalprocess temperature to determine the specified minimum tubewall temperature.

Table G-1—Safety Margins for Different Process Categories

Safety Margin

Category Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Celsius

1 15 8.5

2 15 8.5

3 15 8.5

4 15 8.5

5 25 14.0

6 20 11.0

Note: See G.2.6 for description of categories.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 108: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

100 API STANDARD 661

G.3 Methods of Winterization

G.3.1 AIRFLOW AND AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS

G.3.1.1 System A: Airflow Control

System A generally uses automatically controlled variable-pitch fans, as shown in Figure G-1, and/or automatically ormanually controlled louvers, as shown in Figure G-2, to con-trol airflow.

Automatically controlled variable-pitch fans offer the fol-lowing advantages over louvers:

a. Better airflow control, providing more sensitive control ofprocess temperatures at or near design conditions.b. Lower power requirements at reduced ambient tempera-tures.

Automatically controlled variable-pitch fans have the fol-lowing disadvantages:

a. Less precise airflow control when the required airflow isless than 30 percent of the full airflow.b. More sensitivity to wind effects at lower airflows.

Louvers offer the following advantages over automaticallycontrolled variable-pitch fans:

a. More precise airflow control when the required airflow isless than 30 percent of the full airflow.b. Less sensitivity to wind effects.c. Capability of full closure for warming the unit at start-upand shutdown.

Louvers have the following disadvantages:

a. Less precise control when the required airflow is morethan 30 percent of the full airflow.b. Potentially inoperable linkages as a result of ice, snow,corrosion, or wear.

In addition to the systems shown in Figures G-1 and G-2,airflow can be controlled by using variable-speed drives. Air-flow control is used primarily to control process temperaturesand offers the least winterization protection.

G.3.1.2 System B: Airflow Control Plus Air Tem-perature Control Using a Noncontained Internal Recirculation System

In System B, the automatically controlled variable-pitchfan near the process outlet reverses airflow when the inlet airtemperature is low. The air heated from flow over the tubesenters a zone beneath the tube bundle that is protected tosome degree from wind effects by downward-projecting windskirts. Part of the heated air is then mixed with inlet air asshown in Figures G-3 and G-4. This system may be subject touneven air mixing below the tube bundle and does not pro-vide a positive method of controlling the mixed air inlet tem-

perature. In addition, wind may adversely affect thecirculation of the hot air. Care should be taken in selectingmechanical equipment installed below the downflow fanbecause of the higher air temperature. This system is not gen-erally recommended but has been used for heat exchangersrequiring moderate winterization protection.

G.3.1.3 System C: Airflow Control Plus Air Temperature Control Using a Contained Internal Recirculation System

In System C, the automatically controlled variable-pitchfan near the process outlet reverses when the inlet air temper-ature is low to direct airflow downward while the exhaust lou-vers partially close, as shown in Figure G-5. Simultaneously,the vertical bypass louvers above the tube bundle open toredirect part of the exhaust air along the length of the tubebundle. This air is mixed above the downdraft side of the tubebundle with incoming ambient air. Only enough air isdirected through the bypass louvers to ensure that the mixedair temperature above the downdraft fan is above a presetlevel. For certain design cases, wind skirts may be requiredbelow the tube bundle. The disadvantage of this system is thatareas of the bundle may be exposed to low air temperatures asa result of uneven air mixing. Care should be taken in select-ing mechanical equipment installed on and below the down-flow fan because of the higher air temperature. This systemoffers an additional degree of winterization protection, com-pared with the systems described in G.3.1.1 and G.3.1.2.

G.3.1.4 System D: Airflow Control Plus Air Temperature Control Using an External Recirculation System

In System D, hot exhaust air is recirculated through anexternal recirculation duct to be mixed with inlet air when theinlet air temperature is low. The amount of air recirculated andthe temperature of the mixed stream are controlled by par-tially closing the exhaust louvers while modulating the inletand bypass louvers. This system normally includes a floor sothat the unit is completely enclosed, thus providing positivecontrol of the entering airflow. Although the temperature ofthe process fluid can be controlled by louver action alone,automatically controlled variable-pitch fans may be used tocontrol the process temperature more precisely. Automaticallycontrolled variable-pitch fans may also enable the user toreduce the fan power required at lower ambient temperatures.

Figure G-6 illustrates recirculation over both sides of theunit. Some units may have a recirculation duct over one sideonly. Alternatively, a recirculation duct may be placed at oneor both ends of the unit to minimize the width of the bay or toprovide an enclosed heated area for headers and header walk-ways. In addition, various combinations and locations of inletlouvers can be used to maximize mixing of hot and cold air-streams.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 109: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 101

Figure G-2—System A: Airflow Control with Automatically Controlled Outlet Louvers and Fixed-Pitch Fans

Process in

Process out

Note: The air-cooled heat exchanger may be of the forced- or induced-draft type.TIC = temperature-indicating controller.

TIC

Process in

Process out

Note: The air-cooled heat exchanger may be of the forced- or induced-draft type.TIC = temperature-indicating controller.

TIC

Figure G-1—System A: Airflow Control with Automatically Controlled Variable-Pitch Fans

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 110: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

102 API STANDARD 661

Figure G-4—System B: Forced Draft with Noncontained Internal Air Recirculation

Process in

Process out

TIC

1

6

5

2

3 4

Note: All fans can be of the automatically controlled variable-pitch type. 1 = ambient air temperature switch; 2 = high-limit relay; 3 = reversing relay; 4 = low-limit relay; 5 = three-way solenoid switch; 6 = wind skirt; TIC = temperature-indicating controller.

Process in

Process out

6

Note: All fans can be of the automatically controlled variable-pitch type. 1 = ambient air temperature switch; 2 = high-limit relay; 3 = reversing relay; 4 = low-limit relay; 5 = three-way solenoid switch; 6 = wind skirt; TIC = temperature-indicating controller.

1

5

234

TIC

Figure G-3—System B: Induced Draft with Noncontained Internal Air Recirculation

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 111: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 103

This system provides maximum winterization protection,compared with the systems described in G.3.1.1 throughG.3.1.3.

G.3.2 CONCURRENT FLOW

In a concurrent flow system, the process fluid begins itsflow path at the bottom row of tubes, which is incident to theinlet air, and exists at the top row, which is swept by warm air.Thus, the coldest fluid exchanges heat with the warmest air,resulting in wall temperatures higher than those in a counter-current arrangement. The design of the air-cooled heatexchanger can thus be kept simple, with no recirculation sys-tem required if the tube wall temperature is kept above thespecified minimum.

The main disadvantage of a concurrent flow system is thatadditional surface area is required as a result of the reducedmean temperature difference between the process fluid andthe cooling air.

G.3.3 BARE TUBES OR REDUCED FIN DENSITY

For viscous fluids and other fluids that exhibit low tube-side heat transfer coefficients, the tube wall temperature canbe increased by reducing the fin density or by using baretubes. If the tube wall temperature is thus maintained at orabove the specified minimum value, no additional winteriza-tion protection is required.

G.3.4 VARYING THE ACTIVE HEAT TRANSFER SURFACE

Heat rejection from the process fluid can be controlled byremoving bundles from service, usually by the use of valves,as the ambient temperature drops. This system minimizesheat losses and maintains a higher tube velocity in the activebundles. The higher tube velocity results in a higher tube walltemperature.

The effectiveness of this system depends on whether thereduction in active surface area results in a tube wall tempera-

Process in

Process out

Note: 1 = ambient air temperature switch; 2 = high-limit relay; 3 = reversing relay; 4 = low-limit relay; 5 = three-way solenoid valve 6 = temperature-sensing capillary tube; 7 = low- or high- pressure selector relay; 8 = wind skirt (optional); TIC = temperature-indicating controller.

TIC

TIC

7

5

1

2 3

4

8

6

Figure G-5—System C: Typical Forced-Draft Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger with Contained Internal Air Recirculation

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 112: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

104 API STANDARD 661

ture above the specified minimum value. Pumping capacityshould be checked to ensure it is adequate for the additionalpressure drop that results.

The contents of tubes in idle bundles may have to bepurged or displaced. The stepwise nature of the operationmay limit its applicability.

G.3.5 SERPENTINE COILS

A serpentine coil design uses a single or limited number ofcontinuous flow paths from the inlet to the outlet. Because ofthe limited number of flow paths, tubes with a large diameter[generally 2 to 6 inches (50.8 to 152.4 millimeters)] are used.The tubes can be finned or bare, depending on economics andthe specified minimum tube wall temperature that must bemaintained.

This system usually requires high pressure drops, but thedesign is frequently favored for viscous fluids because thereis little or no possibility of maldistribution.

G.3.6 INDIRECT COOLING

The normal design of an indirect (closed-loop tempered-water) cooling system uses recirculated water in a conven-tional shell-and-tube heat exchanger to cool the process fluid.The recirculated water is in turn cooled to a controlled tem-perature in an air-cooled heat exchanger that uses a fairlysimple form of airflow control (automatically controlled vari-able-pitch fans or louvers) but is not winterized. For ambienttemperatures above 32°F (0°C), ordinary condensate ortreated water may be used. For ambient temperatures lessthan or equal to 32°F (0°C). the water should be mixed withan amount of antifreeze, such as ethylene glycol, sufficient tolower the solution’s freezing point to the lowest expected airtemperature.

This system is usually applied to fluids with a high viscos-ity or a high pour point. The system offers several advantagesfor these fluids:

a. Better process temperature control.b. Less chance of process fluid maldistribution.

Process in

Process out

Note: From 50 to 100 percent of fans should be of the automatically controlled variable-pitch type. 1 = intake louvers; 2 = bypass louvers; 3 = exhaust louvers; 4 = temperature-sensing capillary tube; 5 = low- or high-pressure selector switch; TIC = temperature-indicating controller.

TIC1

2

4

5

3

2

1

TIC

Floor plate or grade

Figure G-6—System D: Typical Forced-Draft Air-Cooled Heat Exchanger with External Air Recirculation

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 113: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 105

c. Better general operability. d. Usually more economical operation.

However, an economic comparison should be made.Appendix G.A provides an example of such a comparison.

G.3.7 DUTY SEPARATION

The duty separation approach divides the process heat dutyinto two separate services. The intermediate temperaturebetween the services is chosen to ensure that the tube walltemperature in the upstream unit will be above the specifiedminimum tube wall temperature for the full range of ambientair temperatures. The upstream unit does not require winter-ization; only the downstream unit is winterized.

G.3.8 COMBINATIONS

Depending on minimum air temperatures and specifiedminimum tube wall temperatures, various combinations ofthe protection methods described in G.3.1 through G.3.7 mayprove economically attractive. The following are examples ofcombination protective methods:

a. A combination of cocurrent and countercurrent bundles.b. Cocurrent bare-tube bundles.c. Duty separation, with varying fin densities, in subsequentbundles in series.

G.3.9 INSTRUMENTATION

G.3.9.1 General

Figures G-1 through G-6 illustrate typical instrumentationschemes for the systems described in G.3.1.1 throughG.3.1.4. The instrumentation methods shown are only sug-gestions.

G.3.9.2 System A

Typical instrumentation for System A (see Figures G-1 andG-2) consists of a temperature sensor in the exit fluid streamand a controller that receives a signal from the sensor andsends signals to one or more devices that control the airflow.These devices may be outlet louvers with a louver actuator,automatically controlled variable-pitch fan hubs, or variable-speed fan drivers.

The most commonly used arrangements include one ormore of the following components:

a. Louvers with pneumatic operators, including valve posi-tioners.b. Automatically controlled variable-pitch fans responding toa pneumatic signal.c. Pneumatic controllers having at least proportional-bandand reset features. A manual/automatic setting is very desir-able.

Electronic controllers and sensing elements may be usedinstead of pneumatic controllers. They usually require anelectronic-to-pneumatic conversion at the fan hub or louveractuator.

G.3.9.3 Systems

G.3.9.3.1 Induced Draft

An induced-draft system typically employs several of thecomponents discussed in G.3.9.2 (Items b and c). However,using the simple types of automatically controlled variable-pitch fans usually makes it necessary to use half the signalrange from the controller for upflow and half for downflow. Itis also necessary to cause a reversal of either the upflow or thedownflow portion of the signal range. A simple way of revers-ing the signal is to use a reversing relay in conjunction with alow-limit relay, as shown in Figure G-3. Since the systemmust operate in two modes (upflow and downflow), an ambi-ent temperature sensor and a selector valve are commonlyused for mode selection. The high-limit relay shown in FigureG-3 is required to cause the split-range operation to occur.The exit end of the last pass is normally the most vulnerableto winterization problems and should be located under thedownflow fan in the warmest air.

G.3.9.3.2 Forced Draft

A forced-draft system, illustrated in Figure G-4, employsthe same components discussed in G.3.9.3.1.

G.3.9.4 System C

Typical instrumentation for System C (see Figure G-5)consists of a temperature sensor in the exit fluid stream, acontroller that receives a signal from the sensor and sends sig-nals to the exhaust louvers, and one or more automaticallycontrolled variable-pitch fans. Another temperature sensor(usually a long averaging bulb) is placed in the airstreamabove the bundle segment most vulnerable to freezing orother problems. A second controller receives a signal fromthis sensor and sends a signal to the partition louvers and theexhaust louvers. The exhaust louvers thus receive two controlsignals and will respond to the one requiring the more closedposition. A high- or low-pressure selector relay is typicallyused to determine which signal reaches the exhaust louvers. Itis not good practice to delete either the partition louver or aseparate actuator for the partition louver. Deletion of the par-tition louver leads to maximum cross-flow at all conditionsand sacrifices heat transfer capability in certain ranges ofoperation while reducing cost very little.

The control elements between the controller and the auto-matically controlled variable-pitch fan are the same as thosediscussed in G.3.9.3.1 and function in the same manner.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 114: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

106 API STANDARD 661

G.3.9.5 System D

The typical instrumentation for System D (see Figure G-6)consists of a temperature sensor in the exit fluid stream and acontroller that receives a signal from the sensor and sends sig-nals to the automatically controlled variable-pitch fans and,optionally, to the exhaust louvers. A second temperature sen-sor (usually a long averaging bulb) is placed in the airstreambelow the bundle segment most vulnerable to freezing orother problems. A second controller receives a signal fromthis sensor and sends a signal to the exhaust louvers, thebypass louvers (if separately actuated), and the inlet louvers.Some of the inlet louvers may be manually operated.

G.4 Critical Process Temperatures

G.4.1 POUR POINTS OF HYDROCARBON LIQUID MIXTURES

Air-cooled heat exchangers that handle gas oil and resid-uum cuts may require winterization. The pour points ofthese hydrocarbon liquid mixtures vary from –60°F to145°F (–51°C to 63°C).

The pour point of a fraction of a hydrocarbon liquid cutwith a known pour point cannot be predicted mathematically.The only realistic method of establishing the pour point ofsuch a fraction is by measurement, using ASTM D97.

The pour point of a blend of two hydrocarbon liquid cutswith known pour points can be approximated by calculation[1, 2, 3]. Because of the imprecision of such calculations,however, when the actual pour point of the blend cannot bemeasured, a safety margin that respects the consequences ofan air-cooled heat exchanger freezing up should be added toany predicted value.

Note: Numbers in brackets in this section refer to references in G.4.6.

G.4.2 FREEZING POINTS OF HYDROCARBONS AND OTHER ORGANIC LIQUID PURE COMPOUNDS

Table G-2 lists the freezing points of frequently encoun-tered refinery hydrocarbon and organic liquid pure com-pounds. air-cooled heat exchangers that process these liquidsmay require winterization.

G.4.3 WATER SOLUTIONS OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS

Water solutions of some of the organic compounds in TableG-2 are also subject to freezing in air-cooled heat exchangers.Freezing-point-concentration relationships for these materialsare valid only for very dilute solutions. Figures G-7 throughG-9 give measured values for freezing points over the entireconcentration range.

G.4.4 AMMONIUM BISULFIDE

Solid ammonium bisulfide (NH4HS) can be deposited bygas or vapor streams when the product of the partial pressuresof ammonia (NH3) and hydrogen sulfide (H2S) exceeds thedissociation constant, Kd, at the temperature of interest and noliquid water is present.

Figure G-10 is a plot of Kd versus temperature, Depositionis not a problem in all-hydrocarbon streams, since the solubil-ity of NH4HS is negligible in hydrocarbons.

G.4.5 HIGH-PRESSURE GASES

Certain gases at high pressure, including C1-C4 paraffinsand olefins, hydrogen sulfide, and carbon dioxide, can formhydrates when saturated with water at temperatures abovewater’s freezing point. These hydrates are solid crystals thatcan collect and plug the tubes of air-cooled heat exchangers.Figure G-11 shows the hydrate-formation conditions for thesepure gases. The API Technical Data Book4 gives semi-empiri-cal methods for predicting hydrates in gas mixtures.

G.4.6 REFERENCES

1. Reid, E.B., and Allen, H.I., “Estimating Pour Points ofPetroleum Distillate Blends,” Petroleum Refiner, 1951, Vol.30, No. 5, pp. 93-95.2. “Index Predicts Cloud, Pour, and Flash Points of DistillateFuel Blends,” Oil and Gas Journal, November 9, 1970, Vol.68, No. 45, pp. 66-69.3. Nelson, W.L., “Is There a Practical Pour-Point Correla-tion?” Oil and Gas Journal, May 14, 1973, Vol. 71, No. 20, p.108.4. “Phase Equilibria in Systems Containing Water,” Chapter 9,Technical Data Book—Petroleum Refining, 4th ed., AmericanPetroleum Institute, Washington, D.C., 1983, pp. 9-23–9-43.

Table G-2—Freezing Points of Frequently Encountered Liquid Pure Components

Freezing Point

CompoundMolecular

WeightDegrees

FahrenheitDegreesCelsius

Water 18.0 32.0 0.0

Benzene 78.1 42.0 5.6

o-Xylene 106.2 –13.3 –25.2

p-Xylene 106.2 55.9 13.3

Cyclohexane 84.1 43.8 6.6

Styrene 104.1 –23.1 –30.6

Phenol 93.1 105.6 40.9

Monoethanolamine 61.1 50.5 10.3

Diethanolamine 105.1 77.2 25.1

Glycerol 92.1 65.0 18.3

Ethylene glycol 62.1 8.6 –13.0

Naphthalene 128.2 176.5 80.3

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 115: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 107

Figure G-8—Freezing Points of Ethanolamine-Water Solutions

100

80

60

40

300 10 20 60 70 80 90 100

5

15

25

35

45

Weight percent phenol

Tem

pera

ture

, deg

rees

Cel

sius

Tem

pera

ture

, deg

rees

Fah

renh

eit

Solid

Phenol-water solution

30

20

10

0

–10

–20

–30

–40

–50

–60

–700 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Weight percent ethanolamine

Tem

pera

ture

, deg

rees

Cel

sius

Triethanolamine

Diethanolamine

Monoethanolamine Trietha

nolam

ine

Dietha

nolam

ine

Monoethanolamine

Figure G-7—Freezing Points of Phenol-Water Solutions

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 116: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

108 API STANDARD 661

Figure G-9—Freezing Points of Glycerol-Water Solutions

20

15

10

5

0

–5

–10

–15

–20

–25

–30

–35

–40

–45

–50

68

59

50

41

32

23

14

5

–4

–13

–22

–31

–40

–49

–58

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Weight percent glycerol

Tem

pera

ture

, deg

rees

Cel

sius

Tem

pera

ture

, deg

rees

Fah

renh

eit

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 117: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 109

Figure G-10—Dissociation Constant of Ammonium Bisulfide (NH4HS)

107

5

2

106

5

2

105

5

2

104

5

2

103

5

2

102

0 40 80 120 140

Temperature, degrees Celsius

Kd

(kP

a)2

Divide Kd by 47.537to express in (psia)2

Deposition ofsolid NH4HS

will occur

No deposition

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 118: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

110 API STANDARD 661

Figure G-11—Hydrate Pressure-Temperature Equilibria

10,000

8000

6000

4000

2000

1000

800

600

400

200

100

80

60

40

20

1010 20 30 40 50 60 70

Pre

ssur

e, p

sia

Propene (propylene)

Ethane

Propane

Carbon dioxide

Ethyne(acetylene)

Ethane

Temperature, degrees Fahrenheit

Notes:1. The curves in the figure indicate the pressure-temperature regions in which gas hydrate formation is favored (above and to the left of the appropriate curve).2. Equilibrium conditions are shown in the figure; however, since hydrate systems typically exhibit metastable tendencies, a metastable hydrate phase can existfar out of the hydrate region. In addition, hydrate formation will not always occur in the region in which formation is favored.3. The figure shows the equilibrium hydrate conditions to within 2 percent of the pressure.4. The discontinuities in the lines correspond to changes in phase of the nonhydrate phases. For multi-component systems, hydrate formation conditions shouldbe determined using the procedures outlined in the API Technical Data Book (see G.4.6). It should be noted that small amounts of impurities can exert a verystrong influence on hydrate formation conditions.5. Sources of hydrate equilibrium data for these figures are listed in Table 9-0.6 of the API Technical Data Book (see G.4.6).6. The figure and the notes above are taken from Chapter 9 of the API Technical Data Book, pages 9-135-9-137 (see G.4.6).

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 119: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 111

Figure G-11—Hydrate Pressure-Temperature Equilibria (Continued)

100,00080,000

60,000

40,000

20,000

10,0008,000

6,000

4,000

2,000

1,000800

600

400

200

10080

60

40

20

108

6

4

2

1–20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Temperature, degrees Fahrenheit

Pre

ssur

e, p

sia

2-methylpropane

Hydrogen sulfide

Ethene (ethylene)

Methane

Argon

Nitrogen

Notes:1. The curves in the figure indicate the pressure-temperature regions in which gas hydrate formation is favored (above and to the left of the appropriate curve).2. Equilibrium conditions are shown in the figure; however, since hydrate systems typically exhibit metastable tendencies, a metastable hydrate phase can existfar out of the hydrate region. In addition, hydrate formation will not always occur in the region in which formation is favored.3. The figure shows the equilibrium hydrate conditions to within 2 percent of the pressure.4. The discontinuities in the lines correspond to changes in phase of the nonhydrate phases. For multi-component systems, hydrate formation conditions shouldbe determined using the procedures outlined in the API Technical Data Book (see G.4.6). It should be noted that small amounts of impurities can exert a verystrong influence on hydrate formation conditions.5. Sources of hydrate equilibrium data for these figures are listed in Table 9-0.6 of the API Technical Data Book (see G.4.6).6. The figure and the notes above are taken from Chapter 9 of the API Technical Data Book, pages 9-135-9-137 (see G.4.6).

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 120: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

112 API STANDARD 661

G.5 Tube Wall Temperature Calculations

G.5.1 GENERAL

G.5.1.1 The need for winterization of air-cooled heatexchangers is a function of the tube wall temperature result-ing from the inlet air temperature and the critical process tem-perature of the fluid. Consideration should be given to thetype of design, the operating modes, and the fluid flow regimeto predict tube wall temperatures accurately.

G.5.1.2 In cross-flow countercurrent air-cooled heatexchanger bundles, the worst condition usually exists at theoutlet of the bottom row of tubes. At this location, the air thatcomes in contact with the tube is at its lowest temperature,and the tube-side fluid is also at the lowest possible tempera-ture. This is usually the critical location, but other locationsmay also need to be considered. Axial-flow fans do not pro-vide completely even airflow distribution. The designershould add at least 20 percent to the air-side heat transfer rateto account for areas of high airflow (see factor fa in G.5.2).The designer must also ensure good tube-side flow distribu-tion within the tube bundle.

G.5.1.3 To calculate the tube wall temperature it is neces-sary to determine the air-side and tube-side resistances ateach location under consideration. Such information may beobtained from the original manufacturer or another suitablesource.

G.5.2 NOMENCLATURE

A = total outside surface area of the bottom layer oftubes, in square feet (square meters).

Ab = outside surface area of the bare tube per unit length,in square feet per foot (square meters per meter).

Af = surface area of the fin per unit length of the tube, insquare feet per foot (square meters per meter).

Ai = inside surface area of the tube per unit length, insquare feet per foot (square meters per meter).

Ao = outside surface area of the finned tube per unitlength, in square feet per foot (square meters permeter).

fa = air-side heat transfer coefficient multiplier toaccount for airflow maldistribution (the recom-mended minimum value is 1.2).

r = local overall thermal resistance, in (degrees Fahren-heit) (square foot) (hour) per British thermal unit[(kelvins) (square meter) per watt].

rc = local clean overall thermal resistance, in (degreesFahrenheit) (square foot) (hour) per British thermalunit [(kelvins) (square meter) per watt].

rds = air-side fouling resistance, in (degrees Fahrenheit)(square foot) (hour) per British thermal unit[(kelvins) (square meter) per watt].

rdt = tube-side fouling resistance, in (degrees Fahrenheit)(square foot) (hour) per British thermal unit[(kelvins) (square meter) per watt].

rfs = local air-side resistance, in (degrees Fahrenheit)(square foot) (hour) per British thermal unit[(kelvins) (square meter) per watt].

rft = local tube-side resistance, in (degrees Fahrenheit)(square foot) (hour) per British thermal unit[(kelvins) (square meter) per watt].

rm = total metal resistance of the tube, in (degrees Fahr-enheit) (square foot) (hour) per British thermal unit[(kelvins) (square meter) per watt].

rmf = fin metal resistance, in (degrees Fahrenheit) (squarefoot) (hour) per British thermal unit [(kelvins)(square meter) per watt].

rmt = tube metal resistance based on the inside surfacearea of the tube, in (degrees Fahrenheit) (squarefoot) (hour) per British thermal unit [(kelvins)(square meter) per watt].

Note: An exact calculation of rmt would require the tube metal resistance to bebased on the logarithmic mean surface area of the tube; however, the rela-tively insignificant magnitude of the error caused by basing the tube metalresistance on the inside surface area of the tube does not justify the complex-ity introduced by the use of the logarithmic mean surface area.

TB = bulk temperature of the tube-side fluid at the loca-tion where the wall temperature is to be calculated,in degrees Fahrenheit (degrees Celsius).

tB = bulk temperature of the air at the location where thewall temperature is to be calculated, in degreesFahrenheit (degrees Celsius).

Tw = tube wall temperature, in degrees Fahrenheit(degrees Celsius).

U = local overall heat transfer coefficient referred to theoutside surface, in British thermal units per (hour)(square foot) (degree Fahrenheit) [watts per (squaremeter) (kelvin)].

φ = fin efficiency.φo = efficiency of the finned tube surface.

G.5.3 CALCULATIONS

G.5.3.1 Once the various resistances have been deter-mined, the wall temperature can be predicted by prorating theresistances relative to the temperature at the outlet or othercritical areas. This can be done using the following equations:

U = 1/r (G-1)

r = (rft + rdt) (Ao/Ai) + rmt (Ao/Ai)

+ (1/φo) (rfs/fa) + rds (G-2)

G.5.3.2 Fins do not cover all of the tube surface, and sincethe exposed bare tube surface may be considered to have anefficiency of 1.00, the efficiency of the finned tube surface isalways higher than that of the fins alone.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 121: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 113

Thus,

φo = 1 – (Af/Ao) (1 – φ) (G-3)

G.5.3.2.1 Fin efficiency is a complex calculation. It can,however, be replaced with an equivalent fin metal resistance,designated as rmf. This metal resistance reaches a constantmaximum value for an outside resistance above some valuedetermined by fin height, thickness, and thermal conductivity.For standard aluminum fins, 90 percent of this value isreached at air-side resistances (rfs) that are lower than thosenormally encountered. The fin metal resistance for these cal-culations may be considered constant with negligible error.

The overall resistance equation can therefore be rewrittenin the following form:

r = (rft + rdt)(Ao/Ai) + rm + (rfs/fa) + rds (G-4)

Where:

rm = rmf + rmt (Ao/Ai)

rmf = [(1 – φo) /φo] [rfs/fa) + rds

G.5.3.2.2 Tables G.B-1A and G.B-1B in Appendix G.Bprovide values of rm for tubes of several common materialswith an outside diameter of 1 inch (25.4 millimeters) and alu-minum fins 0.016-inch (0.4-millimeter) thick and 5/8-inch(15.9-millimeters) high. Other sizes and fin materials requirea φm efficiency calculation to define rmf for the combination.For fin efficiency curves, refer to textbooks such as HeatTransmission1 or Process Heat Transfer2 or to K. A. Gard-ner’s article.3

Note: Numbers in brackets in this section refer to references in G.5.4.

G.5.3.3 Initially, it is best to assume that the unit is clean.Tube-side fouling would increase the surface temperature,since the fluid contact would then be on the surface of thefouling material. The basic resistance equation can be rewrit-ten in the following form:

rc = rft (Ao/Ai) + rm + (rfs/fa) (G-5)

The equations are the same for bare-tube exchangers,except that φo = 1 and Ao is the outside surface area of the baretube, Ab. Since the performance of bare-tube exchangers issensitive to pitch arrangement, the designer should refer tobare-tube correlations such as those described by E. D.Grimison4 for air-side heat transfer coefficient calculations.

The overall resistance for bare tubes is therefore calculatedas follows:

r = (rft + rdt) (Ab/Ai) + rmt + (Ab/Ai) (G-6)

+ (rfs/fa) + rds

For a clean bare-tube unit, this equation reduces to:

rc = rft (Ab/Ai) + rmt (Ab/Ai) + (rfs/fa) (G-7)

G.5.3.4 The tube wall temperature can be calculated on thebasis of a prorated portion of the clean overall resistance:

Tw = TB – (rft/rc) (Ao/Ai) (TB – tB) (G-8)

Sample calculations are given in Appendix G.B.

G.5.3.5 Single-pass, multiple-row air-cooled heat exchang-ers are more susceptible to freezing and pour-point problemsbecause of variations in the layer-to-layer mean temperaturedifference, with the bottom row exchanging more heat thanany of the upper rows. This means that the mixed outlet fluidtemperature cannot be used safely; instead, the bulk tube-sidefluid outlet temperature should be calculated for each row ofconcern.

Two-phase fluids in a single pass with multiple rowsrequire a more complete analysis that recognizes the separa-tion of phases in the header. The problem becomes morecomplex when the units are not designed with equal flowareas in each pass. With viscous fluids, the problem ofextreme flow maldistribution arises. This is difficult to calcu-late, and these fluids should be handled in as few parallelpasses as possible. A single continuous serpentine coil is theideal approach.

G.5.3.6 When the tube wall temperature is calculated, thefollowing operating questions should be considered:

a. At lower temperatures, how much less airflow is needed toremove the required heat?b. Is the unit to operate with fans off or on?c. Does the unit have louvers?d. Has an automatically controlled variable-pitch fan oranother means been provided to reduce airflow?e. Is the unit operating at partial load so that the tube-sideflow conditions affect the wall temperature?

G.5.4 REFERENCES

1. McAdams, W. H., Heat Transmission, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, New York, 1954, pp. 268–271.2. Kern, D. Q., Process Heat Transfer, McGraw-Hill, NewYork, 1950, pp. 538–541.3. Gardner, K. A., “Efficiency of Extended Surface,” Trans-actions of the ASME, Series C: Journal of Heat Transfer,1945, Vol. 67, No. 8, pp. 621–628.4. Grimison, E. D., “Correlation and Utilization of New Dataon Flow Resistance and Heat Transfer for Cross Flow ofGases over Tube Banks,” Transactions of the ASME, SeriesC: Journal of Heat Transfer, 1937, Vol. 59, No. 7, pp. 538–594.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 122: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

114 API STANDARD 661

G.6 Heat Losses

G.6.1 GENERAL

G.6.1.1 Air-cooled heat exchangers are usually largepieces of equipment that are not well suited to beingenclosed. Where airflow must be contained or controlled, lou-vers or sheet metal panels are normally used. Provision mustbe made for shutting down, starting up, or holding suchequipment at standby conditions during periods of minimumair temperature. Under these conditions, the process fluidmay be cooled below its critical process temperature unlessairflow through the bundle is nearly stopped and an auxiliarysource of heat is provided.

G.6.1.2 Unless the amount of heat that will be lost by lou-ver leakage and by conduction through enclosing panels canbe determined, there is no certainty that enough heat can beadded by auxiliary means. Thus, the problem of evaluatingthe auxiliary heat source must begin with determining howmuch heat may be lost under a particular set of circum-stances. Examples of heat loss calculations are given inAppendix G.C.

G.6.1.3 The most important case to be considered is that ofno process flow with fans off, minimum air temperature, andfairly high wind velocity. One should assume that it is neces-sary to maintain the bundle at least 20°F to 30°F (11°C to17°C) above the critical process temperature.

G.6.1.4 A less important case is that of short-duration heatloss when there is no process flow with fans on, minimum airtemperature, and fairly high wind velocity. These conditionsshould occur only during the transition period from operationto shutdown or vice versa, so an example of this case is notgiven in Appendix G.C. The equations of the “fans-off”example can be used to find the louver leakage by using thepressure drop that would exist with fans on instead of thepressure drop resulting from the effect of the hot air column.

G.6.1.5 Several factors should be considered when theauxiliary heat source mentioned in G.6.1.1 and G.6.1.2 isinstalled. A choice should be made about what fluid will beused (usually steam but occasionally an antifreeze solution).The location of the heat source should also be decided. A sep-arate coil that is one row deep is usually placed immediatelybelow the process bundle; however, special considerationsmay dictate less effective placement, such as inside the recir-culation duct.

G.6.2 LOUVER LEAKAGE

Louvers of standard manufacture, maintained in good con-dition, will have a leakage area of not more than 2 percent ofthe face area when closed. This can be reduced to not morethan 1 percent if special, more costly designs are used. The airleakage rate may be calculated for either case. (See G.C.1.3 or

G.C.2.3 in Appendix G.C for a sample calculation.) Tests onstandard louvers indicate that an average louver will have onlyabout half the leak area predicted by maximum tolerances.

G.6.3 SURFACE HEAT LOSS

The heat loss from the sheet metal panels that form theenclosure is a function of the air velocity both inside and out-side, as well as the temperature differential between theenclosed air and the ambient air. (The overall heat transfercoefficient for this surface is calculated for a range of windvelocities in G.C.1.4 and G.C.2.4 in Appendix G.C.) Calcula-tions of this type can also be used to determine the heat lossfrom the hot air being recirculated through the recirculationduct during normal operation. The heat loss calculation forthe duct can be used to assure that the required air tempera-ture to the bundle will be maintained when the recirculated airis blended with the cold inlet air.

G.7 Guidelines

G.7.1 GENERAL

Air-cooled heat exchangers are normally designed to dissi-pate a given heat duty in summer conditions and also dissi-pate the same heat duty (or more) in winter conditions.Additional measures are taken to assure proper operation dur-ing periods of minimum air temperature. These measuresinclude recirculating a fraction of the air so that it will mixwith and heat the incoming cold air. Ducts and louvers arerequired to direct this recirculation.

Provisions to achieve thorough mixing of the recirculatedair with the cold inlet air would be prohibitively expensive.The set point for the average temperature of this mixed air-stream should therefore be above the critical process tempera-ture. For instance, the set point for vacuum steam condensersis usually 35°F to 40°F (1.5°C to 4.5°C). It is important tomeasure the average air temperature in these systems with anaveraging bulb 12 to 20 feet (4 to 6 meters) long that spansthe airstream, and not with a sensor that measures tempera-ture at only one point.

G.7.2 DESIGN METHODS

G.7.2.1 System C: Contained Internal Circulation

System C (see Figure G-5) operates in two modes, thesummer mode and the winter mode. In the summer mode,both fans move air upward and no air is recirculated. In thewinter mode, one fan (normally on the exit end of the unit)moves air downward. This also causes a part of the air that ismoved upward through the bundle (on the end opposite theexit) to flow horizontally across the top of the bundle througha bypass louver and then downward through the bundle. Onlyenough air makes this journey to cause the average tempera-ture of the mixed air entering the bundle on a downward

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 123: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 115

traverse to satisfy a preset value. The duct above the bundlemust be adequately sized for the maximum quantity of airthat must make the journey. A conservative design rule is tosize the duct cross-section based on a linear air velocity of1,000 feet per minute (305 meters per minute), using thequantity of air that passes through the bypass louvers. In nocase should the duct cross-section exceed that required torecirculate 100 percent of the heated air.

An alternative method that has proved to be adequate is tomake the height of the duct space above the top of the sideframe one-tenth of the tube length, rounding to the nearest 0.5foot (0.15 meter). This would require a 4-foot (1.2-meter)height for tube bundles 40 feet (12 meters) in length, and a3.5-foot (1.1-meter) height for tube bundles 36 feet (11meters) in length.

G.7.2.2 System D: External Recirculation

System D (see Figure G-6) operates in only one mode.This means that the air movement is always upward throughthe bundle. When inlet air temperatures are low enough, how-ever, part of this air leaves the bundle and returns to the faninlet by passing over the side or the end of the bundle througha duct with a bypass louver.

This external recirculation duct may be conservativelysized using the same rules as for the internal recirculationduct described in G.7.2.1. The application of these rules willusually result in a duct with a cross-sectional area equal to 20to 30 percent of the bundle face area. When more than 75 per-cent of the heated air must be recirculated, however, the ductsize may approach 40 percent of the bundle face area.

G.8 Mechanical Equipment

G.8.1 GENERAL

When mechanical equipment is to be operated in anextremely cold or hot environment, care should be taken thatthe equipment is specified and designed for the temperatureextremes to which it will be exposed. It is possible that twoheat exchangers located side by side will have differentdesign temperature considerations if one has only airflowcontrol and the other has an external recirculation system.

G.8.2 DESIGN TEMPERATURES

G.8.2.1 Unless otherwise agreed upon, the minimumdesign temperature for the mechanical equipment should bethe minimum design air temperature.

G.8.2.2 Unless otherwise agreed upon, the maximumdesign temperature for mechanical equipment in the air-stream exiting the heat exchanger should be equal to the max-imum process or auxiliary heating fluid temperature. Themaximum air temperature may occur when the fans are notoperating and the louvers are closed.

G.8.2.3 The maximum design temperature for the mechan-ical equipment in the inlet or recirculation airstream dependson the type of winterization system, as described in G.8.2.3.1through G.8.2.3.3. Each operating mode (start-up, normaloperation, and shutdown) must be examined to determine thedesign temperature that should be used.

G.8.2.3.1 In an airflow control system (see Figures G-1and G-2), the maximum design temperature for equipment inthe inlet airstream is the design dry-bulb air temperature.

G.8.2.3.2 In a system with noncontained or containedinternal recirculation (see Figures G-3, G-4, and G-5), themaximum design temperature for the equipment in the inletairstream should be the temperature of the air exiting thereversed-airflow fan during recirculation plus a safety factorof 25°F (14°C).

G.8.2.3.3 Since the air will not be completely mixed in anexternal recirculation system (see Figure G-6), the designtemperature for the mechanical equipment in the inlet air-stream should be chosen carefully. The danger lies in expos-ing the mechanical equipment to hot stratified air that has notbeen mixed with the cooler inlet air. This problem is mostprevalent during start-up.

G.8.3 DESIGN TEMPERATURE RANGE

Most mechanical equipment will operate satisfactorilybetween air temperatures of –20°F (–29°C) and 104°F (40°C)without any modifications. However, since material selectionand design techniques are not standardized for most compo-nents of mechanical equipment, the standardized operatingranges vary among manufacturers.

G.8.4 TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND OPERATING RANGES FOR STANDARD MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

G.8.4.1 General

The characteristics and air temperature ranges given in thissection are typical and are not intended to limit the applica-tion of any equipment. The suitability of continuously operat-ing a particular piece of equipment at a specified designtemperature should be confirmed with the manufacturer.

G.8.4.2 Fans with Manually Adjustable Pitch in Continuous Operation [–65°F to 250°F (–54°C to 121°C)]

For best results in cold weather, fans with manually adjust-able pitch should have hubs made of ductile iron, aluminum,or another material with good ductility. The blade materialshould exhibit similar characteristics.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 124: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

116 API STANDARD 661

G.8.4.3 Fans with Automatically Controlled Variable Pitch in Continuous Operation[–25°F to 250°F (–32°C to 121°C)]

The criteria in G.8.4.2 for hubs and blades for fans withmanually adjustable pitch also apply to automatically con-trolled variable-pitch fans. Since the automatic pitch devicefor each manufacturer’s fans is different, the actual operatingtemperature range and recommendations for extending therange should be obtained from the manufacturer.

G.8.4.4 Electric Motors [–22°F to 140°F (–30°C to 40°C)]

The upper limit on operating temperature for electricmotors may be raised by substituting an insulation systemand a bearing lubricant with a higher temperature rating. Inmost cold weather applications, space heaters are provided inthe motors to maintain the internal air temperature above thedew point.

G.8.4.5 V-Belts [–40°F to 140°F (–40°C to 60°C)] and High-Torque-Type Positive Drive Belts [–30°F to 185°F (–34°C to 85°C)]

Belt life is reduced when belts are operated outside thetemperature ranges given above. Special belts are availablefor operation above and below these ranges. The life expect-ancy of special belts may be shorter than that of standardbelts.

G.8.4.6 Gear Drives [0°F to 170°F (–18°C to 77°C)]

Operation of gear drives below the range given abovewould require changing to a lubricant suitable for the tem-perature and possibly adding an oil heater. Actual tempera-ture ranges and recommendations to extend thetemperature range should be obtained from the gear drivemanufacturer.

G.8.4.7 Bearings [–50°F to 250°F (–45°C to 121°C)]

For bearings, the temperature range above can be extendedby substituting a lubricant suitable for the required tempera-ture range.

G.8.4.8 Steel or Aluminum Louvers [–40°F to 250°F (–40°C to 121°C)]

Louvers should be designed for the expected loads duringoperation at low temperatures. This may require selecting amore ductile material. Snow and ice loads, as well as theeffect of ice on the design and operation of the linkage,should be considered in the design. The temperature rangecan be extended by selecting different bearing materials.

G.8.4.9 Pneumatic Diaphragm Actuators [–40°F to 180°F (–40°C to 82°C)], Pneumatic Piston Actuators I-30°F to 175°F (–34°C to 79°C)], and Pneumatic Positioners [–40°F to 160°F (–40°C to 71°C)]

The temperature range given above for pneumatic actua-tors and positioners can be extended by changing materials ofseveral of the components, including but not limited to dia-phragms and O rings.

G.8.5 AUXILIARY HEATING EQUIPMENT

G.8.5.1 When steam coils are used with any of the winter-ization systems, the maximum design temperature for theexposed mechanical equipment can be determined by thesteam saturation temperature. The radiation effect of thesteam coil is negligible and may be omitted when the designtemperatures of mechanical equipment located below a steamcoil are defined. Steam coils are normally used during start-up and shutdown, but not during general operation. A steamtrap that fails in the open position should be used to avoidfreezing of the steam coil.

G.8.5.2 Other types of auxiliary heating equipment, suchas glycol/water coils, heat transfer fluid coils, electric heaters,and space heaters, are being used successfully.

G.9 Start-Up and Shutdown Procedures

G.9.1 GENERAL

The procedures in this section are intended to supplementusers’ established procedures, not to replace them. The proce-dures apply only to air-cooled heat exchangers with somedegree of winterization, from the simplest (airflow controlonly) to the most complex (full external air recirculation).The procedures apply only to start-up and shutdown duringcold weather.

G.9.2 START-UP PROCEDURES

G.9.2.1 Before start-up, any snow or ice or protective cov-erings that may affect louver or fan operation should beremoved. Depending on the particular weather conditionssnow and ice can sometimes be removed by activating thestart-up heating coil. Care should be taken not to damage thetop louvers. Workers should not walk on the louvers.

G.9.2.2 The instrument air supply should be checked toensure that it is functioning and free from water.

G.9.2.3 Instruments and control valves should be checkedfor satisfactory operation.

G.9.2.4 The operation of all louvers, linkages, and auto-matically controlled variable-pitch fans (if used) should bechecked.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 125: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 117

G.9.2.5 The louvers should be closed, and the start-upheating coil (if not already activated) should be activated. Ifthe heating system is a steam coil, the steam trap should bechecked to ensure that it is functioning satisfactorily. The tubebundle and the air surrounding it should be at a temperaturehigher than the critical process temperature before the bundleis placed in service.

G.9.2.6 For systems with internal circulation (see FiguresG-3, G-4, and G-5), the control system should be verified asbeing in the winter mode, that is, with the fan nearest the pro-cess outlet pitched to blow air down through the bundle andthe other fan pitched to force air up through the bundle. Bothfans should be set at their maximum airflow position.

G.9.2.7 For systems with external recirculation (see FigureG-6), the following steps should be taken:

a. When a linkage between the top louvers and the bypasslouvers is provided, it should be checked to ensure that thebypass louvers are working as intended.b. The operation and means of actuation of the inlet louversshould be checked.c. The exchanger’s enclosure should be checked to ensurethat no large openings are allowing ambient air into the enclo-sure.

G.9.2.8 Normal procedures should be followed when theunit is started up; however, certain process conditions may

necessitate special start-up requirements. For instance, steamcondensers or viscous liquid coolers at moderate tempera-tures should generally have the process stream introduced ator near the full flow rate. In contrast, process streams at hightemperatures should be introduced to the exchanger graduallyto minimize high thermal stresses that might cause mechani-cal failure.

G.9.2.9 The fans should be turned on, the louvers and auto-matically controlled variable-pitch fans should be placed onautomatic control, and the heating coil should be shut offwhen normal operating conditions are reached.

G.9.3 SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES

G.9.3.1 Before shutdown, the fans should be shut off, thelouvers should be closed, and the heating coil, if provided,should be activated.

G.9.3.2 The normal plant procedure for shutdown shouldbe followed.

G.9.3.3 If steam purging is required, caution should beexercised to assure that the condensate is thoroughly drained.

G.9.3.4 The heating coil should be turned off.

G.9.3.5 The normal plant procedures for protecting theequipment during shutdown periods should be followed.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 126: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 127: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

119

APPENDIX G.A—SAMPLE ECONOMIC COMPARISON OF INDIRECT (TEMPERED-WATER) VERSUS DIRECT AIR COOLING FOR

SYSTEMS REQUIRING WINTERIZATION

G.A.1 General

Before an economic comparison can be made betweenindirect and direct air cooling for systems requiring winter-ization, it is necessary to select the operating temperatures forthe tempered water. This is an important factor in the eco-nomics of the system. The outlet temperature from the air-cooled heat exchanger, t2 (see Figure G.A-1), is a function ofthe design dry-bulb air temperature and of the critical processand tube wall temperatures in the shell-and-tube heatexchanger. Temperature t1 should be set above the criticalprocess temperature. The temperature range, t1 – t2, affects thesize of the tempered-water air-cooled heat exchanger, theshell-and-tube exchanger, and the circulating pump, anddetermines the number of shells in series. The temperaturerange should be selected to optimize the components for theparticular system.

The conclusions of the example in G.A.2 and G.A.3 arespecific for this application only. Each application should beinvestigated.

G.A.2 Example (Customary Units)Note: The direct air-cooled heat exchanger system described in this para-graph, although an actual application, may not represent the optimum design.In addition, the equipment costs given in this example are based on 1981 dataand are for purposes of illustration only; when an actual economic compari-son is made, current cost data should be used.

A residuum cooler is designed to cool 800,000 pounds perhour of atmospheric residuum from 340°F to 200°F. The

design dry-bulb air temperature is 120°F, and the minimumdesign air temperature is 32°F. The residuum pour point is95°F, and the inlet and outlet viscosities are 6.0 and 48 centi-poises, respectively. The inlet and outlet temperatures of thecirculating water were selected as 135°F and 254°F, respec-tively, giving a flow rate of 500,000 pounds per hour. Notethat the problem selected is based on a pressurized water sys-tem. Table G.A-1A describes the two systems, and TableG.A-2 compares their costs.

G.A.3 Example (SI Units)Note: The direct air-cooled heat exchanger system described in this para-graph, although an actual application, may not represent the optimum design.In addition, the equipment costs given in this example are based on 1981 dataand are for purposes of illustration only; when an actual economic compari-son is made, current cost data should be used.

A residuum cooler is designed to cool 363,000 kilogramsper hour of atmospheric residuum from 171°C to 93°C. Thedesign dry-bulb air temperature is 49°C, and the minimumdesign air temperature is 0°C. The residuum pour point is35°C, and the inlet and outlet viscosities are 6.0 and 48.0 cen-tipoises, respectively. The inlet and outlet temperatures of thecirculating water were selected as 57°C and 123°C, respec-tively, giving a flow rate of 227,000 kilograms per hour. Notethat the problem selected is based on a pressurized water sys-tem. Table G.A-1B describes the two systems, and TableG.A-2 compares their costs.

Circulatingpump

Water cooler

Processfluid

Processcooler

T1

T2

t1t2

Figure G.A-1—Tempered-Water System

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 128: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

120 API STANDARD 661

Table G.A-1A—Description of Indirect and Direct Air Cooling Systems(Customary Units)

Item Indirect SystemWinterized Air-Cooled

Heat Exchanger

Equipment

Shell-and-tube exchanger 16,000 square feet —

Air-cooled exchanger 13,000 square feet a

Pump 1,000 gallons per minute —

Piping/surge tank NPS 6/500 gallons —

Installation Cost Factorsb

Shell-and-tube exchanger 2.7 —

Air-cooled exchanger 1.8 1.8

Pump 2.5 —

Piping/surge tank 2.5 —

Driver Requirements

Air-cooled exchanger fans 150 brake horsepower 215 brake horsepower

Pump 25 brake horsepower —

Note: NPS = nominal pipe size.aThe process duty of the winterized air-cooled heat exchanger is divided into two services, with a different exchanger configuration to handle each. Both configu-rations have full external recirculation and steam coils. For the 340°F to 260°F cooling range, the configuration consists of two bays 19 feet wide and 30 feet long, with two bundles per bay. Each bundle has five rows and 12 passes. The tubes have an outside diameter (OD) of 2 inches and have ten 5/8-inch-high aluminum fins per inch. The tubes are in an equilateral triangular pattern and have a 1-inch transverse pitch. The extended surface area is 142,800 square feet (8671 square feet of bare tube surface area). For the 260°F to 200°F cooling range, the configuration consists of three parallel bays 16 feet wide and 30 feet long, with six bundles per bay. There are two parallel strings of three bundles in series. Each bundle has six rows and three passes. The tubes are bare, with an OD of 1 inch and a wall thick-ness of 0.109 inch. The tubes are in an equilateral triangular pattern and have a 13/4-inch transverse pitch. The surface area is 44,485 square feet. bThe installation cost factors may vary depending on location, labor costs, and the like.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 129: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 121

Table G.A-1B—Description of Indirect and Direct Air Cooling Systems(SI Units)

Item Indirect SystemWinterized Air-Cooled

Heat Exchanger

Equipment

Shell-and-tube exchanger 1486 square meters —

Air-cooled exchanger 1208 square meters a

Pump 227 cubic meters per hour —

Piping/surge tank NPS 6/1.89 cubic meters —

Installation Cost Factorsb

Shell-and-tube exchanger 2.7 —

Air-cooled exchanger 1.8 1.8

Pump 2.5 —

Piping/surge tank 2.5 —

Driver Requirements

Air-cooled exchanger fans 111.9 kilowatts 160.3 kilowatts

Pump 18.6 kilowatts —

Note: NPS = nominal pipe size.aThe process duty of the winterized air-cooled heat exchanger is divided into two services, with a different exchanger configuration to handle each. Both configu-rations have full external recirculation and steam coils. For the 171.11°C to 126.67°C cooling range, the configuration consists of two bays 5.79 meters wide and 9.14 meters long, with two bundles per bay. Each bundle has five rows and 12 passes. The tubes have an outside diameter (OD) of 50.8 millimeters and have 394 15.88-millimeter-high aluminum fins per meter. The tubes are in an equilateral triangular pattern and have a 101.6-millimeter pitch. The extended surface area is 12,289 square meters (806 square meters of bare tube surface area). For the 226.67°C to 93.33°C cooling range, the configuration consists of three parallel bays 4.88 meters wide and 9.14 meters long, with six bundles per bay. There are two parallel strings of three bundles in series. Each bundle has six rows and three passes. The tubes are bare, with an OD of 25.4 millimeters and a wall thickness of 2.77 millimeters. The tubes are in an equilateral triangular pattern and have a 44.45-millimeter transverse pitch. The surface area is 4133 square meters.bThe installation cost factors may vary depending on location, labor costs, and the like.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 130: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

122 API STANDARD 661

Table G.A-2—Comparison of Costs of Indirect and Direct Air Cooling Systems

Item Indirect System ($)Winterized Air-Cooled

Heat Exchanger ($)

Equipment Costsa

Shell-and-tube exchanger 150,000 —

Air-cooled exchanger 287,000 1,136,000

Pump 10,000 —

Piping/surge tank 20,000 —

Installed Costsb

Shell-and-tube exchanger 405,000 —

Air-cooled exchanger 516,000 2,045,000

Pump 25,000 —

Piping/surge tank 50,000 —

Power Costsc

Air-cooled exchanger fans 225,000 322,000

Pump 37,000 —

Evaluated Total Costd

System 1,258,000 2,367,000

Notes:aThe equipment costs are based on 1981 data.bThe installed cost is obtained by multiplying the installation cost factor by the purchase price of the equipment in question. The cost includes associated piping, excavation, concrete, structural steel, electrical work, instrumentation, painting, and insulation.cThe electric power costs were calculated based on $1500 per brake horsepower ($2011 per kilowatt).dThe evaluated total cost is equal to the sum of the installed costs and the power costs.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 131: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

123

APPENDIX G.B—CALCULATION OF MINIMUM TUBE WALL TEMPERATURE

G.B.1 Sample Calculation of Minimum Tube Wall Temperature for Finned Tubes (Customary Units)

G.B.1.1 GENERAL

The forced-draft unit specified in G.B.1.2 is designed tocool 116,000 pounds per hour of gas oil product (with a grav-ity of 21.4° API and a UOP K of 11.5) from 290°F to 160°F,with an air inlet temperature of 90°F. The designer desires tocalculate the minimum tube wall temperature at the outlet ofthe bottom row of tubes for an air inlet temperature of 10°Fand a minimum airflow of 147,000 pounds per hour, which isrequired to maintain the design process outlet temperature.The pour point of the gas oil is 50°F.

G.B.1.2 UNIT DESCRIPTION

The unit consists of one bay containing one tube bundlethat is 9.5 feet wide and 30 feet long, with 7 rows and 7passes. The bundle contains 319 carbon steel tubes with anoutside diameter of 1 inch and a wall thickness of 0.109 inch,arranged in an equilateral triangular pattern on a 21/2-inchpitch. The tubes have 10 aluminum fins per inch; the fins are5/8-inch high and 0.016-inch thick.

G.B.1.3 DATA

The variables for which values are given below are definedin G.5.2.

Ai = 0.2047 square foot per foot.Ao = 5.5 square feet per foot.fa = 1.2.rfs = 0.3367 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)

per British thermal unit.rft = 0.0389 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)

per British thermal unit.rm = 0.0251 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)

per British thermal unit (from Table G.B.1.A)rc = rft (Ao/Ai) + rm + (rfs/fa)

= 0.0389 (5.5/0.2047) + 0.0251 + (0.3367/1.2)= 1.351 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)

per British thermal unit.tB = 10°F.

TB = 160°F.TW = TB – (rft/rc) (Ao/Ai) (TB – tB)

= 160 – (0.0389/1.351) (5.5/0.2047) (160 – 10)= 44°F.

The calculated tube wall temperature is well below the rec-ommended temperature of 75°F (50°F plus 25°F for thesafety margin). Consequently, the designer must consider awinterization method that will adequately protect this design

against pour-point problems. In this situation, System C or Doffers possible solutions to be investigated; however, thedesigner decides to solve this problem in another way, asshown in G.B.2.

G.B.2 Sample Calculation of Minimum Tube Wall Temperature of Bare Tubes (Customary Units)

G.B.2.1 GENERAL

The designer decides to design the unit using both finnedand bare tubes. The new design features a tube bundle withthe upper rows of finned tubes and the lower rows of baretubes. The amount of air at 10°F required to satisfy the designprocess outlet temperature of 160°F is the same as for thedesign in G.B.1.1. The designer now calculates the minimumtube wall temperature at the outlet of the bottom row of baretubes.

G.B.2.2 UNIT DESCRIPTION

The unit consists of one bay containing one tube bundlethat is 9.5 feet wide and 30 feet long, with 8 rows and 8passes. The top six rows of the bundle contain 273 carbonsteel tubes with an outside diameter of 1 inch and a wallthickness of 0.109 inch, arranged in an equilateral triangularpattern on a 21/2-inch pitch. These tubes have 10 aluminumfins per inch; the fins are 5/8 inch high and 0.016 inch thick. Inaddition, the bundle contains 166 carbon steel bare tubes inthe bottom two tube rows. These tubes also have an outsidediameter of 1 inch and a wall thickness of 0.109 inch and arearranged in an equilateral triangular pattern on a 13/8-inchpitch.

G.B.2.3 DATA

The data for the bottom row of bare tubes are as follows:

Ab = 0.2618 square foot per foot.Ai = 0.2047 square foot per foot.rfs = 0.153 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)

per British thermal unit.rft = 0.058 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)

per British thermal unit.rmt = 0.0004 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)

per British thermal unit.rc = rft (Ab/Ai) + rmt + (rfs/fa)

= 0.058 (0.2618/0.2047) + 0.0004 + (0.153/1.2)= 0.202 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)

per British thermal unit.TW = TB – (rft/rc) (Ab/Ai) (TB – tB)

= 160 – (0.058/0.202) (0.2618/0.2047) (160 – 10)

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 132: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

124 API STANDARD 661

Table G.B-1A—Values for rm Referred to the Total Outside Area for a Tube With an Outside Diameter of 1 Inch and Aluminum Fins 5/8 Inch High and 0.016 Inch Thick, in (Degrees Fahrenheit) (Square Foot) (Hour) per British Thermal Unit

Tube Wall Thickness (Inches)

Tube Material ka

No. of Finsper Inch 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.109 0.134

Admiralty 70 7 0.01677 0.01708 0.01745 0.01787 0.01852 0.019188 0.01700 0.01735 0.01777 0.01825 0.01898 0.019439 0.01720 0.01760 0.01806 0.01860 0.01942 0.02025

10 0.01739 0.01782 0.01833 0.01893 0.01984 0.0207611 0.01755 0.01803 0.01859 0.01925 0.02024 0.02125

Aluminum 90 7 0.01655 0.01677 0.01702 0.01732 0.01778 0.018248 0.01675 0.01700 0.01729 0.01763 0.01814 0.018669 0.01692 0.01720 0.01752 0.01790 0.01848 0.01906

10 0.01708 0.01738 0.01774 0.01816 0.01879 0.0194411 0.01722 0.01755 0.01794 0.01840 0.01909 0.01980

Carbon steel 26 7 0.01789 0.01867 0.01959 0.02067 0.02230 0.023968 0.01827 0.01916 0.02020 0.02142 0.02327 0.025159 0.01862 0.01961 0.02078 0.02214 0.02421 0.02631

10 0.01896 0.02005 0.02134 0.02285 0.02513 0.0274511 0.01927 0.02047 0.02188 0.02353 0.02603 0.02858

Stainless steel 9.3 7 0.02068 0.02263 0.02493 0.02762 0.03169 0.03584(Types 302, 304, 8 0.02143 0.02364 0.02625 0.02930 0.03392 0.03862316, 321, and 9 0.02215 0.02463 0.02755 0.03095 0.03611 0.04137347) 10 0.02286 0.02559 0.02882 0.03258 0.03829 0.04409

11 0.02355 0.02654 0.03008 0.03420 0.04045 0.04681

Note: The tabulated values are based on an assumed maximum air-side resistance (rfs, or rfs + rds) of 0.15. Assume fin efficiency φ = 1. ka = thermal conductivity, in British thermal units (hour) (square foot) (degree Fahrenheit) per foot.

Table G.B-1B—Values for rm Referred to the Total Outside Area for a Tube With an Outside Diameter of 25.4 Millimeters and Aluminum Fins 15.9 Millimeters High and 0.4 Millimeter Thick, in (Kelvins) (Square Meter) per Watt

Tube Wall Thickness (Millimeters)

Tube Material ka

No. of Finsper Meter 0.89 1.24 1.65 2.10 2.77 3.40

Admiralty 121 276 0.00295 0.00301 0.00307 0.00315 0.00326 0.00338315 0.00299 0.00306 0.00313 0.00321 0.00334 0.00342354 0.00303 0.00310 0.00318 0.00328 0.00342 0.00357394 0.00306 0.00314 0.00323 0.00333 0.00349 0.00366433 0.00309 0.00318 0.00327 0.00339 0.00356 0.00374

Aluminum 155.6 276 0.00291 0.00295 0.00300 0.00305 0.00313 0.00321315 0.00295 0.00299 0.00304 0.00310 0.00319 0.00329354 0.00298 0.00303 0.00309 0.00315 0.00325 0.00336394 0.00301 0.00306 0.00312 0.00320 0.00331 0.00342433 0.00303 0.00309 0.00316 0.00324 0.00336 0.00349

Carbon steel 45.0 276 0.00315 0.00329 0.00345 0.00364 0.00393 0.00422315 0.00322 0.00337 0.00356 0.00377 0.00410 0.00443354 0.00328 0.00345 0.00366 0.00390 0.00426 0.00463394 0.00334 0.00353 0.00376 0.00402 0.00443 0.00483433 0.00339 0.00360 0.00385 0.00414 0.00458 0.00503

Stainless steel 16.08 276 0.00364 0.00399 0.00439 0.00486 0.00558 0.00631(Types 302, 304, 315 0.00377 0.00416 0.00462 0.00516 0.00597 0.00680316, 321, and 354 0.00390 0.00434 0.00485 0.00545 0.00636 0.00729347) 394 0.00403 0.00451 0.00508 0.00574 0.00674 0.00776

433 0.00415 0.00467 0.00530 0.00602 0.00712 0.00824

Note: The tabulated values are based on an assumed maximum air-side resistance (rfs, or rfs + rds) of 0.0264. Assume fin efficiency φ = 1. ka = thermal conductivity, in watts per (meter) (kelvin).

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 133: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 125

= 105°F.

The calculated tube wall temperature at the outlet of thebottom row of bare tubes is well above 75°F, and no gas oilfreeze-up is anticipated. To verify that the finned section ofthe bundle is also protected, the designer decides to calculatethe tube wall temperature of the outlet of the sixth pass (therow of finned tubes immediately above the bare tubes). Fromthe thermal design calculations, the designer obtains the fol-lowing data:

rfs = 0.3356 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)per British thermal unit.

rft = 0.0236 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)per British thermal unit.

rc = rft (Ao/Ai) + rm + (rfs/fa)= 0.0236 (5.5/0.2047) + 0.0251 + (0.3356/1.2)= 0.939 (degree Fahrenheit) (square foot) (hour)

per British thermal unit.tB = 31.3°F (air temperature leaving the bare tube sec-

tion).TB = 173.4°F (gas oil temperature leaving the sixth

pass).TW = TB – (rft/rc) (Ao/Ai) (TB – tB)

= 173.4 – (0.0236/0.939) (5.5/0.2047) x (173.4 – 31.3)

= 77.4°F ( > 75°F).

It appears that this design is safe against a potential freeze-up for continuous operation. As in all viscous fluid coolers,however, an auxiliary heating coil is recommended for coldstart-up.

G.B.3 Sample Calculation of Minimum Tube Wall Temperature for Finned Tubes (SI Units)

G.B.3.1 GENERAL

The forced-draft unit specified in G.B.3.2 is designed tocool 52,618 kilograms per hour of gas oil product (with agravity of 21.4° API and a UOP K of 11.5) from 143°C to71°C, with an air inlet temperature of 32°C. The designerdesires to calculate the minimum tube wall temperature at theoutlet of the bottom row of tubes for an air inlet temperatureof –12°C and a minimum airflow of 66,679 kilograms perhour, which is required to maintain the design process outlettemperature. The pour point of the gas oil is 10°C.

G.B.3.2 UNIT DESCRIPTION

The unit consists of one bay containing one tube bundlethat is 2.90 meters long, with 7 rows and 7 passes. The bundlecontains 319 carbon steel tubes with an outside diameter of25.4 millimeters and a wall thickness of 2.77 millimeters,arranged in an equilateral triangular pattern on a 63.5-milli-

meter pitch. The tubes have 394 aluminum fins per meter; thefins are 15.9 millimeters high and 0.4 millimeter thick.

G.B.3.3 DATA

The variables for which values are given below are definedin G.5.2:

Ai = 0.0624 square meter per meter.Ao = 1.68 square meters per meter.fa = 1.2.rfs = 0.0593 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.rft = 0.00685 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.rm = 0.00442 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt (from

Table G.B-1B).rc = rft (Ao/Ai) + rm + (rfs/fa)

= 0.00685 (1.68/0.0624) + 0.00442 + (0.0593/1.2)= 0.238 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.

tB = –12°C.TB = 71°C.TW = TB – (rft/rc) (Ao/Ai) (TB – tB)

= 71 – (0.00685/0.238) (1.68/0.0624)[71 – (–12)]= 6.7°C.

The calculated tube wall temperature is well below the rec-ommended temperature of 23.9°C (10°C plus 13.9°C for thesafety margin). Consequently, the designer must consider awinterization method that will adequately protect this designagainst pour-point problems. In this situation, System C or Doffers possible solutions to be investigated; however, thedesigner decides to solve this problem in another way, asshown in G.B.4.

G.B.4 Sample Calculation of Minimum Tube Wall Temperature of Bare Tubes (SI Units)

G.B.4.1 GENERAL

The designer decides to design the unit using both finnedand bare tubes. The new design features a tube bundle withthe upper rows of finned tubes and the lower rows of baretubes. The amount of air at –12°C required to satisfy thedesign process outlet temperature of 71°C is the same as forthe design in G.B.3.1. The designer now calculates the mini-mum tube wall temperature at the outlet of the bottom row ofbare tubes.

G.B.4.2 UNIT DESCRIPTION

This unit consists of one bay containing one tube bundlethat is 2.90 meters wide and 9.14 meters long, with 8 rowsand 8 passes. The top six rows of the bundle contain 273 car-bon steel tubes with an outside diameter of 25.4 millimetersand a wall thickness of 2.77 millimeters, arranged in an equi-lateral triangular pattern on a 63.5-millimeter pitch. These

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 134: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

126 API STANDARD 661

tubes have 394 aluminum fins per meter; the fins are 15.9 mil-limeters high and 0.4 millimeter thick. In addition, the bundlecontains 166 carbon steel bare tubes in the bottom two tuberows. These tubes also have an outside diameter of 25.4 milli-meters and a wall thickness of 2.77 millimeters and arearranged in an equilateral triangular pattern on a 34.9-milli-meter pitch.

G.B.4.3 DATA

The data for the bottom row of bare tubes are as follows:

Ab = 0.0798 square meter per meter.Ai = 0.0624 square meter per meter.rfs = 0.0629 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.rft = 0.0102 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.

rmt = 0.000070 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.rc = rft (Ab/Ai) + rmt + (rfs/fa)

= 0.0102 (0.0798/0.0624) + 0.000070 + (0.0269/1.2)= 0.0355 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.

TW = TB – (rft/rc) (Ab/Ai) (TB – tB)= 71 – (0.0102/0.0355) (0.0798/0.0624) x

[71 – (–12)]= 40.5°C.

The calculated tube wall temperature at the outlet of thebottom row of bare tubes is well above 23.9°C, and no gas oilfreeze-up is anticipated. To verify that the finned section ofthe bundle is also protected, the designer decides to calculatethe tube wall temperature at the outlet of the sixth pass (therow of finned tubes immediately above the bare tubes). Fromthe thermal design calculations, the designer obtains the fol-lowing data:

rfs = 0.059 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.rft = 0.00415 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.rc = rft (Ao/Ai) + rm + (rfs/fa)

= 0.00415 (1.68/0.0624) + 0.0044 + (0.059/1.2)= 0.1653 (kelvin) (square meter) per watt.

tB = –0.4°C (air temperature leaving the bare tube section).

TB = 78.5°C (gas oil temperature leaving the sixth pass).TW = TB – (rft/rc) (Ao/Ai) (TB – tB)

= 78.5 – (0.00415/0.1653) (1.68/0.0624) x [78.5 – (–0.4)]

= 25.2°C (> 23.9°C).

It appears that this design is safe against a potential freeze-up for continuous operation. As in all viscous fluid coolers,however, an auxiliary heating coil is recommended for coldstart-up.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 135: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

127

APPENDIX G.C—SAMPLE CALCULATION OF HEAT LOSSES

G.C.1 Sample Calculation of Heat Losses (Customary Units)

G.C.1.1 GENERAL

In the examples in this appendix, the temperature differen-tial between the ambient air and the enclosed air must beestablished. In the calculation determining the minimum heatinput requirement for an auxiliary heating coil, the tempera-ture of the air enclosed in the plenum surrounding the processcoil should be the temperature to which it is desired to warmthe process bundle.

Within a heated enclosure, air near the top will be hotterthan air near the bottom. An inside air temperature will beassumed for the top of the enclosure as well as the bottom.These assumed air temperatures are not recommended airtemperatures but are simply assumed values used to illustratethe calculation procedure.

Note that the louver area is assumed to be the same as theface area of the tube bundle—this is not always the case.

G.C.1.2 NOMENCLATURE

G.C.1.2.1 Variables

A1 = louver leakage area, in square feet. (In the calcu-lations below, A1 is assumed to be 2 percent of thetube bundle face area.)

cp = average specific heat capacity, in British thermalunits per (pound) (degree Fahrenheit) (taken as0.24 for air).

Fp = pressure promoting leakage, in feet of fluid.g = acceleration due to gravity

= 32.17 feet per second per second.H = height of the hot air column, in feet.h = local heat transfer coefficient, in British thermal

units per (hour) (square foot) (degree Fahrenheit).Q = rate of heat loss per unit time, in British thermal

units per hour.T = temperature, in degrees Fahrenheit.U = overall heat transfer coefficient, in British ther-

mal units per (hour) (square foot) (degree Fahr-enheit).

V = velocity, in feet per second.W = flow rate per unit time, in pounds per hour.ρ = density of air, in pounds per cubic foot.

G.C.1.2.2 Subscripts

o = relating to conditions outside the air-cooled heatexchanger.

i = relating to conditions inside the air-cooled heatexchanger.

G.C.1.3 LOUVER LEAKAGE

G.C.1.3.1 Air that is warmer than ambient air and is con-tained in an unsealed enclosure tries to rise within that enclo-sure and exerts a pressure on the upper surface. This causesleakage when the upper surface consists of nonsealing louverblades. The pressure promoting leakage may be expressed asfollows:

Fp = [H(ρo – ρi)]/ρi (G.C-l)

The velocity through the leak areas (assuming a loss of 1.5velocity heads) is:

V= (2gFp/1.5)l/2 (G.C-2)

The rate at which warm air leaks through the louvers is:

W = 3600 VρiA1 (G.C-3)

The rate of heat loss due to louver leakage is:

Q = Wcp (Ti – To) (G.C-4)

A sample calculation of heat loss due to louver leakage ispresented in G.C.1.3.2.

G.C.1.3.2 Assume the following conditions: A totallyenclosed air-cooled heat exchanger is 14 feet wide, 36 feetlong, and 8 feet high. The inside air temperature Ti is 100°F,and the outside air temperature To is 0°F. Assuming that theperfect-gas laws apply, the air density can be determinedfrom Equation G.C-5:

ρ = (MP)/(RT) (G.C-5)

Where:M = molecular weight of air = 28.96.P = pressure, in pounds per square inch absolute.R = gas constant

= 10.73 (cubic feet) (pounds per square inch absolute) per (pound-mole) (degrees Rankine).

T = temperature of air, in degrees Rankine.

Therefore, the outside air density is:

ρo = [(28.96) (14.70)]/[(10.73) (0 + 459.67)]

= 0.0863 pound per cubic foot.

The inside air density is:

ρi = [(28.96) (14.70)]/[(10.73) (100 + 459.67)]

= 0.0709 pound per cubic foot.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 136: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

128 API STANDARD 661

The pressure promoting leakage through the louvers isdetermined using Equation G.C-1 as follows:

Fp = [H(ρo – ρi)]/ρi

= [8 (0.0863 – 0.0709)]/0.0709

= 1.738 feet of air.

The velocity through the louver leakage area resultingfrom this pressure is calculated using Equation G.C-2 as fol-lows:

V = (2gFp/l.5)l/2

= [(2) (32.17) (1.738)/1.5]1/2

= 8.63 feet per second.

The air leakage rate through the louvers is calculated usingEquation G.C-3 as follows:

W = 3600V ρiAl

= (3600) (8.63) (0.0709) [(0.02) (14) (36)]

= 22,203 pounds per hour.

The rate of heat loss resulting from louver leakage is thendetermined using Equation G.C-4 as follows:

Q = Wcp (Ti – To)

= (22,203) (0.24) (100 – 0)

= 532,900 British thermal units per hour.

G.C.1.4 SURFACE HEAT LOSS

G.C.1.4.1 The heat lost by convection from the exteriorsurfaces of the plenum is a function of temperature differ-ence, wind velocity, and surface area. For velocities less than16 feet per second, the following equation from Heat Trans-mission (see G.5.4) is recommended for determining the heattransfer coefficient for airflow parallel to flat surfaces:

h = 0.99 + 0.21V (G.C-6)

Note: This equation is derived for vertical surfaces. For simplicity, however.it is used here for all surfaces, since most are vertical.

For velocities of 16 feet per second and higher, the follow-ing equation is recommended:

h = 0.5 (V)0.78 (G.C-7)

A sample calculation of heat loss by convection from anair-cooled heat exchanger is presented in G.C.1.4.2.

G.C.1.4.2 Assume the following conditions: A totallyenclosed air-cooled heat exchanger is 18 feet wide, 36 feet

long, and 16 feet high (from grade to the top of the louvers).The inside air temperature varies linearly from 100°F at thetop to 50°F at the bottom. The outside air temperature is 0°F.The inside air velocity is 2 feet per second. The outside windvelocity is 30 feet per second.

The overall heat transfer coefficient is calculated as follows:

hi = 0.99 + 0.21V= 0.99 + (0.21) (2)= 1.41 British thermal units per (hour) (square foot)

(degree Fahrenheit).

ho = 0.5 (V) 0.78= 0.5 (30) 0.78= 7.09 British thermal units per (hour) (square foot)

(degree Fahrenheit).

U = 1/[(l/hi) + (1/ho)]= 1/[(1/1.41) + (1/7.09)]= 1.176 British thermal units per (hour) (square

foot) (degree Fahrenheit).

The total surface heat loss is determined as follows:

Q = UA(Ti – To)= (1.17) {(18) (36) (100 – 0) + (16)

(18 + 18 + 36 + 36) [(100 + 50)/2 – 0]}= 227,400 British thermal units per hour.

G.C.1.5 TOTAL HEAT LOSS CALCULATION

G.C.1.5.1 Forced Draft with External Recirculation

Assume that an enclosure is 18 feet wide, 36 feet long, and18 feet high. The dimensions of the top louver area are 14 feetby 36 feet. Inlet air louvers are located on the sides near thebottom. There is a hot air column that is 9 feet high betweenthe heating coil and the top louvers. Assume an outside airtemperature of 0°F and an inside air temperature that varieslinearly from 100°F above the heating coil to 50°F at the bot-tom of the enclosure.

The heat loss through the top louvers may be calculated asfollows:

ρo = 0.0863 pound per cubic foot.

ρi = 0.0709 pound per cubic foot.

The pressure promoting leakage resulting from the effectof the hot air column above the heating coil is determined asfollows:

Fp1 = [H(ρo – ρi)]/ρi

= [(9) (0.0863 – 0.0709)]/0.0709

= 1.95 feet of air.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 137: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 129

The air density at the average temperature below the heat-ing coil is:

ρi = (MP)/(RTi)

= [(28.96) (14.7)] ÷ {(10.73) [(100 + 50)/2 + 459.67]}

= 0.0742 pound per cubic foot.

The pressure promoting leakage below the heating coil isdetermined by:

Fp2 = [H (ρo – ρi)]/ ρi

= [9 (0.0863 – 0.0742)]/0.0742

= 1.47 feet of air.

The total pressure promoting leakage is the sum of thepressures above and below the heating coil:

Fpd = Fp1 + Fp2

= 1.95 + 1.47

= 3.42 feet of air.

This pressure drop, however, assumes no restriction of theinlet air to the exchanger. Since the entire exchanger isenclosed, the entering air must come through the inlet lou-vers. The quantity of inlet air must equal the quantity ofexhaust air. It can be assumed that the effective pressure pro-moting leakage, Fp*, will be equally divided between the inletand exhaust louvers. Therefore:

Fp* = 3.42/2

= 1.71 feet of air.

The velocity through the louver leak area is:

V = (2gFp* / l.5)l/2

= [(2) (32.17) (1.71)/1.5]l/2

= 8.56 feet per second.

The heat loss resulting from louver leakage is then:

Q = Wcp (Ti – To)

= [(3600) (8.56) (0.0709)] [(0.02) (14) (36)] x (0.24) (100 – 0)

= 528,600 British thermal units per hour.

The overall heat transfer coefficient, U, is 1.176 Britishthermal units per (hour) (square foot) (degree Fahrenheit).The surface heat loss is:

Q = UA (Ti – To)

= 1.176 [(9) (18 + 18 + 36 + 36) (100 – 0)] + 1.176 {(9) (18 + 18 + 36 + 36)

x [(100 + 50) /2 – 0]}

+ 1.176 [(18) (36)] (100 – 0)

= 276,200 British thermal units per hour.

G.C.1.5.2 Forced Draft without Louvers

This case is discussed to show that heat loss is from four toeight times greater without top louvers than when louvers arepresent. This loss is caused by an unimpeded natural draft ofair through the tube bundle. Under such conditions, it is rea-sonable to assume an air velocity of 50 feet per minute at thebundle face. Assume the following air-cooled heat exchangergeometry, as used in the example in G.C.1.3: A totallyenclosed air-cooled heat exchanger is 14 feet wide, 36 feetlong, and 8 feet high. Also assume that the air is heated from0°F to 100°F.

The heat loss is calculated as follows: The warm air lossthrough the bundle is:

W = 3600Vρi A

= (3600) (50/60) (0.0709) [(14) (36)]

= 107,200 pounds per hour.

This leads to the following heat loss:

Q = Wcp (Ti – To)

= (107,200) (0.24) (100 – 0)

= 2,572,000 British thermal units per hour.

For other designs that may require analysis, it is recom-mended that the principles shown in these examples beapplied.

G.C.2 Sample Calculation of Heat Losses (SI Units)

G.C.2.1 GENERAL

In the examples in this appendix, the temperature differen-tial between the ambient air and the enclosed air must beestablished. In the calculation determining the minimum heatinput requirement for an auxiliary heating coil, the tempera-ture of the air enclosed in the plenum surrounding the processcoil should be the temperature to which it is desired to warmthe process bundle.

Within a heated enclosure, air near the top will be hotterthan air near the bottom. An inside air temperature will beassumed for the top of the enclosure as well as the bottom.These assumed air temperatures are not recommended air

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 138: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

130 API STANDARD 661

temperatures but are simply assumed values used to illustratethe calculation procedure.

Note that the louver area is assumed to be the same as theface area of the tube bundle—this is not always the case.

G.C.2.2 NOMENCLATURE

G.C.2.2.1 Variables

A1 = louver leakage area, in square meters. (In the cal-culations below, A1 is assumed to be 2 percent ofthe tube bundle face area.)

cp = average specific heat capacity, in kilojoules per(kilogram) (kelvin) (taken as 1.005 for air).

Fp = pressure promoting leakage, in meters of fluid.g = acceleration due to gravity

= 9.807 meters per second per second.H = height of the hot air column, in meters.h = local heat transfer coefficient, in watts per

(square meter) (kelvin).Q = rate of heat loss per unit time, in watts.T = temperature, in degrees Celsius.U = overall heat transfer coefficient, in watts per

(square meter) (kelvin).V = velocity, in meters per second.W = flow rate per unit time, in kilograms per hour.ρ = density of air, in kilograms per cubic meter.

G.C.2.2.2 Subscripts

o = relating to conditions outside the air-cooled heatexchanger.

i = relating to conditions inside the air-cooled heatexchanger.

G.C.2.3 LOUVER LEAKAGE

G.C.2.3.1 Air that is warmer than ambient air and is con-tained in an unsealed enclosure tries to rise within that enclo-sure and exerts a pressure on the upper surface. This causesleakage when the upper surface consists of nonsealing louverblades. The pressure promoting leakage may be expressed asfollows:

Fp = [H(ρo – ρi)]/ρi (G.C-8)

The velocity through the leak areas (assuming a loss of 1.5velocity heads) is:

V = (2gFp/1.5)1/2 (G.C-9)

The rate at which warm air leaks through the louvers is:

W = 3600Vρi A1 (G.C-10)

The rate of heat loss due to louver leakage is:

Q = Wcp (Ti – To) (G.C-11)

A sample calculation of heat loss due to louver leakage ispresented in G.C.2.3.2.

G.C.2.3.2 Assume the following conditions: A totallyenclosed air-cooled heat exchanger is 4.27 meters wide, 10.97meters long, and 2.44 meters high. The inside air temperatureTi is 37.78°C, and the outside air temperature To is –17.78°C.Assuming that the perfect-gas laws apply, the air density canbe determined from Equation G.C-12:

ρ = (MP)/(RT) (G.C-12)

Where:M = molecular weight of air

= 28.96.P = absolute pressure, in kilopascals.R = gas constant

= 8.31 joules per (gram-mole) (kelvin).T = temperature, in kelvins.

Therefore, the outside air density is:

ρo = [(28.96) (101.33)]/[(8.31) (–17.78 + 273.15)]

= 1.383 kilograms per cubic meter.

The inside air density is:

ρi = [(28.96) (101.33)]/(8.31) (37.78 + 273.15)]

= 1.136 kilograms per cubic meter.

The pressure promoting leakage through the louvers isdetermined using Equation G.C-8 as follows:

Fp = [H(ρo – ρi)]/Pi

= [2.44 (1.383 – 1.136)]/1.136

= 0.531 meter of air.

The velocity through the louver leakage area resultingfrom this pressure is calculated using Equation G.C-9 as fol-lows:

V = (2gFp/l.5)l/2

= [(2) (9.807) (0.531)/1.5]l/2

= 2.63 meters per second.

The air leakage rate through the louvers is calculated usingEquation G.C-10 as follows:

W = 3600V ρiA1

= (3600) (2.63) (1.136) [(0.02) (4.27) (10.97)]

= 10,076 kilograms per hour.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 139: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR GENERAL REFINERY SERVICE 131

The rate of heat loss resulting from louver leakage is thendetermined using Equation G.C-11 as follows:

Q = Wcp (Ti – To)

= (10,076) [(1.005) (100/3600)] x [37.78 – (– 17.78)]

= 156,300 watts.

G.C.2.4 SURFACE HEAT LOSS

G.C.2.4.1 C.2.4.1 The heat lost by convection from theexterior surfaces of the plenum is a function of temperaturedifference, wind velocity, and surface area. For velocities lessthan 4.88 meters per second, the following equation fromHeat Transmission (see G.5.4) is recommended for determin-ing the heat transfer coefficient for airflow parallel to flat sur-faces:

h = 7.88 + 0.21V (G.C-12)

Note: This equation is derived for vertical surfaces. For simplicity, however,it is used here for all surfaces, since the majority are vertical.

For velocities of 4.88 meters per second and higher, thefollowing equation is recommended:

h = 7.17(V)0.78 (G.C-13)

A sample calculation of heat loss by convection from anair-cooled heat exchanger is presented in G.C.2.4.2.

G.C.2.4.2 Assume the following conditions: A totallyenclosed air-cooled heat exchanger is 5.49 meters wide,10.97 meters long, and 4.88 meters high (from grade to thetop of the louvers). The inside air temperature varies linearlyfrom 37.78°C at the top to 10.0°C at the bottom. The outsideair temperature is –17.78°C. The inside air velocity is 0.61meter per second. The outside wind velocity is 9.14 metersper second.

The overall heat transfer coefficient is calculated as fol-lows:

hi = 7.88 + 0.21V= 7.88 + (0.21) (0.61)= 8.01 watts per (square meter) (kelvin).

ho = 7.17 (V)0.78

= 7.17(9.l4)0.78

= 40.26 watts per (square meter) (kelvin).

U = 1/[(1/hi) + (1/ho)]= 1/[(1/8.01) + (1/40.26)]= 6.68 watts per (square meter) (kelvin).

The total surface heat loss is determined as follows:

Q = UA (Ti – To)

= 6.68 {[(5.49) (10.97)] [37.78 – (–17.78)] + (4.88)(5.49 + 5.49 + 10.97 + 10.97)

x [(37.78 + 10)/2 – (–17.78)]}

= 67,000 watts.

G.C.2.5 TOTAL HEAT LOSS CALCULATION

G.C.2.5.1 Forced Draft with External Recirculation

Assume that an enclosure is 5.49 meters wide, 10.97meters long, and 5.49 meters high. The dimensions of the toplouver area are 4.27 meters by 10.97 meters. Inlet air louversare located on the sides near the bottom. There is a hot air col-umn that is 2.74 meters high between the heating coil and thetop louvers. Assume an outside air temperature of –17.78°Cand an inside air temperature that varies linearly from37.78°C above the heating coil to 10.0°C at the bottom of theenclosure.

The heat loss through the top louvers may be calculated asfollows:

ρo = 1.383 kilograms per cubic meter.

ρi = 1.136 kilograms per cubic meter.

The pressure promoting leakage resulting from the effectof the hot air column above the heating coil is determined asfollows:

Fp1 = [H (ρo – ρi)]/ρi

= [2.74 (1.383 – 1.136)]/1.136

= 0.596 meter of air.

The air density at the average temperature below the heat-ing coil is:

ρi = (MP)/(RT)

= [(28.96) (101.33)]

÷ {(8.31) [(37.78 + 10.0)/2 + 273.15]}

= 1.189 kilograms per cubic meter.

The pressure promoting leakage below the heating coil isdetermined by:

Fp2 = [H (ρo – ρi)]/ρi

= [2.74 (1.383 – 1.189)]/1.189

= 0.447 meter of air.

The total pressure promoting leakage is the sum of thepressures above and below the heating coil:

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 140: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

132 API STANDARD 661

Fpt = Fpl + Fp2

= 0.596 + 0.447

= 1.043 meters of air.

This pressure drop, however, assumes no restriction of theinlet air to the exchanger. Since the entire exchanger isenclosed, the entering air must come through the inlet lou-vers. The quantity of inlet air must equal the quantity ofexhaust air. It can be assumed that the effective pressure pro-moting leakage, Fp*, will be equally divided between the inletand the exhaust louvers. Therefore,

Fp* = 1.043/2

= 0.522 meter of air.

The velocity through the louver leak area is:

V = (2gFp* /1.5)1/2

= [(2) (9.807) (0.522)/1.5]1/2

= 2.61 meters per second.

The heat loss resulting from louver leakage is then:

Q = Wcp (Ti – To)

= [(3600) (2.61) (1.136)] [(0.02) (4.27) (10.97)]

x [(1.005) (1000/3600)] [37.78 – (–17.78)]

= 155,100 watts.

The overall heat transfer coefficient, U, is 6.68 watts per(square meter) (kelvin). The surface heat loss is:

Q = UA(Ti – To)

= 6.68 (2.74) (5.49 + 5.49 + 10.97)

x [37.78 – (–17.78)]

+ 6.68 (2.74) (5.49 + 5.49 + 10.97 + 10.97)

x [(37.78 + 10.0)/2 – (–17.78)]

+ 6.68 [(5.49) (10.97)] [(37.78 – (–17.78)]

= 80,900 watts.

G.C.2.5.2 Forced Draft without Louvers

This case is discussed to show that heat loss is from four toeight times greater without top louvers than when louvers arepresent. This loss is caused by an unimpeded natural draft ofair through the tube bundle. Under such conditions, it is rea-sonable to assume an air velocity of 15.24 meters per minuteat the bundle face. Assume the following air-cooled heatexchanger geometry, as used in the example in G.C.2.3: Atotally enclosed air-cooled heat exchanger is 4.27 meterswide, 10.97 meters long, and 2.44 meters high. Also assumethat the air is heated from –17.78°C to 37.78°C.

The heat loss is calculated as follows: The warm air lossthrough the bundle is:

W = 3600V ρiA

= (3600) (15.24/60) (1.136) [(4.27) (10.97)]

= 48,700 kilograms per hour.

This leads to the following heat loss:

Q = Wcp (Ti – To)

= (48,700) [(1.005) (1000/3600)] x [(37.78 – (–17.78)]

= 754,700 watts.

For other designs that may require analysis, it is recom-mended that the principles shown in these examples beapplied.

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 141: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

PD—01200—11/97—7C—

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000

Page 142: Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers for General Refinery Servicesfa.mech.sut.ac.ir/Downloads/AcademicStaff/17/Courses/35/API 661 - Air... · design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing,

Additional copies available from API Publications and Distribution:(202) 682-8375

Information about API Publications, Programs and Services is available on the World Wide Web at: http://www.api.org

Order No.: C66104

COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000COPYRIGHT 2000 American Petroleum InstituteInformation Handling Services, 2000


Recommended